advertisement
Litho in U.S.A.
Part Number X2015 A First Edition
2000 GMC Sierra
Owner's Manual
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 1999
All Rights Reserved i
ii
Table of Contents
Seats and Restraint Systems
Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Four-Wheel Drive Operation (If Equipped)
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Features and Controls
Instrument Panel, Warning Lights and Gages
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
Radio/Cassette Player/CD Player
Radio Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
Your Driving and the Road
Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions
Problems on the Road
iii
iv
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Service and Appearance Care
Checking Fluids and Lubricants
Passenger Compartment Air Filter (If Equipped)
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Electrical System/Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Section 7 Scheduled Maintenance
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedures
Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation
Warranty Information (See Warranty Manual)
Reporting Safety Defects on page 8-10
Service Publications
Section 9
Index
In the Index you will find an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual.
You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.
Please refer to the last page of this manual for your
Service Station Guide
v
We support voluntary technician certification.
yellow blue
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, GMC, the GMC Emblem and the name SIERRA are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for GMC whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it.
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9
vi
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly.
yellow blue
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or others could be hurt.
vii
You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book. This safety symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this happen.” yellow blue
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle.
viii
yellow blue
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example, these symbols are used on an original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven:
These symbols have to do with your lamps:
MASTER
LIGHTING
SWITCH
These symbols are on some of your controls:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
TURN
SIGNALS
WINDSHIELD
WASHER
PARKING
LAMPS CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
POWER
WINDOW
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
AIR BAG FOG LAMPS
VENTILATING
FAN
These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights:
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
BRAKE
COOLANT
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
Here are some other symbols you may see:
FUSE
LIGHTER
HORN
SPEAKER
FUEL
ix
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
Regular Cab Pickup
Extended Cab Pickup
x
Chassis Cab yellow blue
Service Station Guide
For a More
Detailed Look at
What's Under the Hood
Battery
Cooling System
Tire Pressure
Spare Tire Pressure
Hood Release
Windshield Washer
Fluid
Engine Oil Dipstick
Oil Viscosity
Remote Fuel
Door Release
Alternate
Fuel Door Release
Fuel
yellow blue
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
11 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
1 15 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts - and the Answers
1 16 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
1 23 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
1 24 Right Front Passenger Position
1 35 Center Passenger Position
1 40 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
1 65 Checking Your Restraint Systems
1 65 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash
1-
1-1
yellow blue
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats - how to adjust them, and fold them up and down. It also tells you about reclining front seatbacks and head restraints.
Manual Front Seat
CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
If your vehicle has a manual bucket or split bench seat, you can adjust it with this lever located at the front of the seat.
Lift the lever at the front of the seat to unlock it. Using your body, slide the seat to where you want it. Then, release the lever and try to move the seat with your body in order to make sure the seat is locked into place.
1-2
Cushion Tilt (If Equipped) yellow blue
Manual Lumbar Control (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has a lumbar adjustment, you can increase or decrease lumbar support in an area of the lower seatback.
If your vehicle has this feature, you can raise or lower the front of the driver’s or passenger’s seat with this lever located at the inside edge of the seat. To raise or lower the front of the seat, move the lever up or down in a continuous motion until the cushion reaches the desired height.
To increase support, turn the knob towards the front of the vehicle.
To decrease support, turn the knob towards the rear of the vehicle.
1-3
Power Seat(s) (If Equipped)
Horizontal Control: If your vehicle has a power seat, you can adjust it with this control located at the outside edge of the seat.
yellow blue
Raise the front of the seat cushion by raising the forward edge of the button. Lower the front of the seat cushion by lowering the forward edge of the button. Move the seat forward by moving the whole button toward the front of the vehicle.
Raise the rear of the seat cushion by raising the rear edge of the button. Lower the rear of the seat cushion by lowering the rear edge of the button. Move the seat rearward by moving the whole button toward the rear of the vehicle.
Moving the whole button up or down raises or lowers the entire seat cushion.
Vertical Control: If your vehicle has the power reclining seats, you can use this button to adjust the angle of the seatback. Move the reclining front seatback rearward by moving the button toward the rear of the vehicle. Move the seatback forward by moving the button toward the front of the vehicle. See “Reclining
Seatbacks” in the Index for further information.
1-4
Power Lumbar Control (If Equipped)
If you have power lumbar adjustment, you can increase or decrease lumbar support in an area of the lower seatback.
yellow blue
Memory Seat (If Equipped)
The memory function controls the driver’s seat cushion and recliner positions.
To increase support, press and hold the front of the control. Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support.
To decrease support, press and hold the rear of the control. Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support.
You can also reshape the back wing area of the lower seatback.
To increase support, press and hold the top of the control. Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support.
To decrease support, press and hold the bottom of the control. Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support.
It does not store the lumbar or back support positions.
To set your memory seat:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat to your desired position.
2. Press the SET button and then press the 1 or 2 side of the memory control within five seconds.
When your vehicle is in PARK (P), press the 1 or 2 button of the memory control to recall the seat setting.
To do the same thing for a second driver, follow the preceding steps, but press the other number of the memory control.
1-5
yellow blue
Heated Front Seats (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has heated front seats, the ignition must be in RUN for them to operate.
Reclining Seatbacks
The control for the driver’s side heated seat is located on the driver’s side door panel. The control for the passenger’s side heated seat is located on the passenger’s side door panel.
To activate the heated seats, press the button once for the HI heat setting. Press the button again for the LO heat setting. To turn off the heated seats, press the button a third time. An indicator light on the button will illuminate for each heat setting anytime the heated seats are operating.
To adjust the front seatback, lift the lever upward.
Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it.
Lift the lever again upward and the seatback will go to an upright position.
If your vehicle has power seats with a power recliner, see “Power Seats” in the Index for further information on how to operate the reclining seatback feature.
1-6
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.
1-7
Head Restraints
Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
On some models, the head restraints tilt forward and rearward also.
To tilt the head restraints forward, grasp the top of the restraint and move it forward to where you want it to go until you hear a click. It will then be locked into that position until you need to move it again. Pulling it forward past the last position will allow the restraint to return to its upright position.
Seatback Latches
The seatbacks fold forward to let you access the rear of the cab.
To fold a front seatback forward, pull this lever forward and fold the seatback forward.
yellow blue
CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright position, just push the seatback rearward until it latches. After returning the seatback to its upright position, pull the seatback forward to make sure it is locked.
1-8
Easy Entry Seat (Extended Cab Only)
(If Equipped)
yellow blue
To operate the seat, pull forward on the top of this lever and tilt the seatback forward toward the front of the vehicle.
CAUTION:
If any easy entry seat isn’t locked, it can move.
In a sudden stop or crash, the person sitting there could be injured. And, even if there is no crash or sudden stop, a driver sitting in an unlocked easy entry seat could be startled by the sudden movement and hit the wrong control or pedal, causing an accident. After you’ve used it, be sure to push rearward on any easy entry seat to be sure it is locked.
The manual driver side front bucket seat and the manual driver side split bench seat of your vehicle may have an easy entry feature. This makes it easy to get in and out of the rear seat.
When you do, the seat bottom will release. Just pull or push the seat forward until it stops.
To return the seat to its regular position, return the seatback to its upright position, then push the whole seat rearward until it latches.
After returning the seat to its regular position, try to move the seat with your body in order to make sure the seat is locked into place.
1-9
Rear Seat (Extended Cab)
Folding the Rear Seat
The extended cab’s rear seat can be folded up to provide more cargo space. To fold the seat:
1. Pull forward on the release strap located under the rear seat cushion.
yellow blue
3. Push and pull on the seat to make sure the seat is secure.
2. Fold the seat cushion upward until it latches with the seatback.
The extended cab’s rear seat can also be folded open for more seating space. To use the seat:
1. Push rearward on the seat cushion while pulling up on the release strap under the seat cushion. Pull the seat cushion downward until it latches.
2. After pulling the seat cushion down, pull up on it to make sure it is locked.
1-10
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too.
yellow blue
CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in the Index.)
1-11
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
yellow blue
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.
1-12
yellow blue
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn’t stop.
1-13
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
or the instrument panel ...
1-14
yellow blue
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts make such good sense.
yellow blue
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts
--
and the Answers
Q:
Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be - whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q:
If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts - not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions.
1-15
Q:
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an accident - even one that isn’t your fault - you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called “Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
yellow blue
1-16
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up straight.
yellow blue
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-17
yellow blue
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-18
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
yellow blue
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way.
1-19
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
yellow blue
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-20
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
yellow blue
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen.
1-21
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
yellow blue
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-22
yellow blue
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-23
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt - except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and start again.
Air Bag System
This part explains the air bag system.
Your vehicle has air bags - one air bag for the driver and another air bag for the right front passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations.
1-24
yellow blue
Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system:
CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren’t wearing your safety belt - even if you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. All air bags are designed to work with safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear, side or low speed frontal crashes. And, for unrestrained occupants, air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly - whether or not there’s an air bag for that person.
CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you would be if you were leaning forward, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with air bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual called “Children.”
1-25
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows the air bag symbol.
How the Air Bag System Works
The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information.
yellow blue
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
1-26
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
yellow blue
CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person. The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put anything between an occupant and an air bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering.
1-27
When should an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash. The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near frontal impacts.
The air bag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions, including off road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain.
As always, wear your safety belt. See “Off Road
Driving” in the Index for more tips on off road driving.
yellow blue
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions.
1-28
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag module - the steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag - will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.
yellow blue
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag.
D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
D Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which records information about the air bag system. The module records information about the readiness of the system, when the system commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment. Some modules also record speed, engine rpm, brake and throttle data.
D Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system. Improper service can mean that your air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service.
1-29
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not work properly. You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or break the air bag coverings.
AIR BAG OFF Switch
Your vehicle has a switch on the instrument panel that you can use to turn off the right front passenger’s air bag.
yellow blue
1-30
This switch should only be turned to AIR BAG OFF if the person in the right front passenger’s position is a member of a passenger risk group identified by the national government as follows:
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat because:
D my vehicle has no rear seat;
D my vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear facing infant seat; or
D the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Child age 1 to 12.
A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because:
D my vehicle has no rear seat;
D although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or
D the child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
yellow blue
Medical Condition.
A passenger has a medical condition which, according to his or her physician:
D causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk for the passenger; and
D makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning off the air bag and allowing the passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash.
CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s air bag is turned off for a person who isn’t in a risk group identified by the national government, that person won’t have the extra protection of an air bag. In a crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group.
1-31
To turn off the right front passenger’s air bag, insert your ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the switch to AIR BAG OFF.
The AIR BAG OFF light will come on to let you know that the right front passenger’s air bag is off. The right front passenger’s air bag will remain off until you turn it back on again, and the AIR BAG OFF light will stay on to remind you that the air bag is off.
1-32
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when you have turned off the air bag, it means that something may be wrong with the air bag system.
The right front passenger’s air bag could inflate even though the switch is off.
If your vehicle is a regular cab pickup and this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right front passenger’s position (for example, don’t secure a rear facing child restraint in your vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
If your vehicle is an extended cab pickup and this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right front passenger’s position (for example, don’t secure a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger’s seat) until you have your vehicle serviced.
yellow blue
To turn the right front passenger’s air bag on again, insert your ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the switch to the ON position.
yellow blue
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
CAUTION:
For up to two minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air bag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellow connectors. They are probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-33
Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Q:
If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the front of my vehicle, will it keep the air bags from working properly?
A:
As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the air bags from working properly in a crash.
Q:
Is there anything I might add to the front of the vehicle that could keep the air bags from working properly?
A:
Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or height, they may keep the air bag system from working properly. Also, the air bag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the air bag sensors. If you have any questions about this, you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle. (The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure” in the Index.)
1-34
yellow blue
Q:
What if I add a snow plow? Will it keep the air bags from working properly?
A:
We’ve designed our air bag systems to work properly under a wide range of conditions, including snow plowing with vehicles equipped with the optional Snow Plow Prep Package (RPO
VYU). But don’t change or defeat the snow plow’s
“tripping mechanism.” If you do, it can damage your snow plow and your vehicle, and it may cause an air bag inflation.
yellow blue
Center Passenger Position
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats, someone can sit in the center positions.
When you sit in a center seating position, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
1-35
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-36
yellow blue
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
(Extended Cab)
Lap
-
Shoulder Belt (Extended Cab)
The positions next to the windows have lap shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
yellow blue
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted. The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-37
yellow blue
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-38
yellow blue
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-39
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
If your vehicle has a rear seat, your vehicle has shoulder belt comfort guides. This feature will provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the interior body.
yellow blue
1-40
yellow blue
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The guide must be on top of the belt.
1-41
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as described in “Rear Seat Passenger Positions
(Extended Cab)” earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out from the guides. Slide the guide onto the storage clip.
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
1-42
CAUTION:
Smaller children and babies should always be restrained in a child or infant restraint. The instructions for the restraint will say whether it is the right type and size for your child. A very young child’s hip bones are so small that a regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force right on the child’s abdomen, which could cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that any child small enough for one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint.
yellow blue
Infants need complete support, including support for the head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a frontal crash, an infant in a rear facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of the infant’s body, the back and shoulders. A baby should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint. This is so important that many hospitals today won’t release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is an infant restraint available for the baby’s first trip in a motor vehicle.
1-43
1-44
CAUTION:
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much - until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240 lb. (110 kg) force on your arms. The baby would be almost impossible to hold.
CAUTION: (Continued) yellow blue
CAUTION: (Continued)
Secure the baby in an infant restraint. If you’re using the infant restraint in the right front passenger’s position, be sure to turn off the air bag. See “Air Bag Off Switch” and “Securing a
Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position” in the Index for more on this, including important safety information.
yellow blue
1-45
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have protection provided by appropriate restraints.
Q:
What are the different types of add on child restraints?
A:
Add on child restraints are available in four basic types. When selecting a child restraint, take into consideration not only the child’s weight and size, but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used.
An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed, make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
yellow blue
1-46
yellow blue
A rear facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear facing infant restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head, neck and body can have the support they need in a frontal crash. Some infant seats come in two parts - the base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part is removable.
1-47
1-48
yellow blue
A forward facing child restraint (C E) positions a child upright to face forward in the vehicle.
These forward facing restraints are designed to help protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs.
(9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches
(66 to 102 cm) in height, or up to around four years of age. One type, a convertible restraint, is designed to be used either as a rear facing infant seat or a forward facing child seat.
A booster seat (F) is designed for children who are about 40 to 60 lbs., or even up to 80 lbs.
(18 to 27 kg, or even up to 36 kg), and about four to eight years of age. A booster seat is designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Booster seats with shields use lap only belts; however, booster seats without shields use lap shoulder belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see out the window.
yellow blue
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s manual and the child restraint instructions are important, so if either one of these is not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
1-49
Where to Put the Restraint
(Regular Cab Pickup)
The child restraint must be secured properly in the right front passenger seat. If you want to secure a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger’s seat, turn off the passenger’s air bag. See “AIR BAG OFF Switch” and “Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat
Position” in the Index for more on this, including important safety information.
CAUTION:
A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Be sure to turn off the air bag before using a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat position.
yellow blue
Where to Put the Restraint
(Extended Cab Pickup)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in the rear seat. There is limited space in the rear seating area of an extended cab model. If you want to secure a child restraint in a rear seating position of an extended cab model, especially in the rear center position, be sure to study the instructions that came with your child restraint to see if there is enough room to secure your seat properly.
If you want to secure a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger’s seat, turn off the passenger’s air bag. See “AIR BAG OFF Switch” and “Securing a
Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position” in the Index for more on this, including important safety information.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle - even when no child is in it.
1-50
yellow blue
Top Strap
CAUTION:
A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Be sure to turn off the air bag before using a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat position.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle - even when no child is in it.
In Canada, the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be anchored. In the United States, some child restraints also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored.
If your vehicle is a regular cab pickup, an anchor bracket is located behind the right front passenger’s seat.
1-51
yellow blue
In order to get to the bracket, you’ll have to remove the trim plug covering it.
If you need to have an anchor bracket installed for a rear seat position in an extended cab, your dealer can get a special kit with anchor hardware and installation instructions and then install the anchor for you. This work will be done for you free of charge. Or, you may install the anchor yourself using the instructions provided in the kit.
Anchor the top strap to this bracket. Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself.
1-52
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position (Extended Cab)
There is limited space in the rear seating area of an extended cab model. If you want to secure a child restraint in a rear outside seating position, be sure to study the instructions that came with your child restraint to see if there is enough room to secure your seat properly.
yellow blue
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.
You’ll be using the lap shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-53
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.
1-54
yellow blue
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position
yellow blue
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Rear Seat Position (Extended Cab Pickup)
Don’t use child restraints in this position. The restraints won’t work properly.
If you have an extended cab pickup, you can secure a child restraint in the center rear seat position.
There is limited space in the rear seating area of an extended cab model. If you want to secure a child restraint in a rear seating position of an extended cab model, especially in the rear center position, be sure to study the instructions that came with your child restraint to see if there is enough room to secure your seat properly.
You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1-55
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-56
yellow blue
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
yellow blue
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. There’s a switch on the instrument panel that you can use to turn off the right front passenger’s air bag when you want to secure a rear facing child restraint at the right front passenger’s position. See “AIR BAG OFF Switch” in the Index for more on this, including important safety information.
1-57
1-58
CAUTION:
A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Be sure to turn off the air bag before using a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat position. If a forward facing child restraint is suitable for your child, always move the passenger seat as far back as it will go.
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat.
yellow blue
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when you have turned off the air bag, it means that something may be wrong with the air bag system.
The right front passenger’s air bag could inflate even though the switch is off.
If your vehicle is a regular cab pickup and this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right front passenger’s position (for example, don’t secure a rear facing child restraint in your vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced. See
“AIR BAG OFF Switch” in the Index.
If your vehicle is an extended cab pickup and this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right front passenger’s position (for example, don’t secure a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger’s seat) until you have your vehicle serviced. See “AIR BAG OFF Switch” in the Index.
yellow blue
You’ll be using the lap shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s air bag.
If you are using a rear facing child restraint in this seat, make sure the air bag is turned off. (See “AIR
BAG OFF Switch” in the Index.) If your child restraint is forward facing, always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing it in this seat.
(See “Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-59
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock.
1-60
yellow blue
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.
yellow blue
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
If you were using a rear facing child restraint, turn on the right front passenger’s air bag when you remove the rear facing child restraint from the vehicle unless the person who will be sitting there is a member of a passenger air bag risk group. See “AIR BAG OFF
Switch” in the Index.
CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s air bag is turned off for a person who isn’t in a risk group identified by the national government, that person won’t have the extra protection of an air bag. In a crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group. See “AIR BAG
OFF Switch” in the Index for more on this, including important safety information.
1-61
Larger Children
yellow blue
Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the safety belts properly.
D Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in a crash.
D Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other people who are.
1-62
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one.
1-63
1-64
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
yellow blue
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.) yellow blue
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section.
1-65
✍
NOTES
1-66
yellow blue
yellow blue
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly - and what to do if you have a problem.
Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Rear Access Door (Extended Cab)
2 12 Content Theft Deterrent (If Equipped)
2 20 Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
2 21 Automatic Transmission Operation
2 24 Manual Transmission Operation
2 28 Four Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
2 35 Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
37 Shifting Out of PARK (P) (Automatic
2-
2 38 Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission
38 Parking Over Things That Burn
2 39 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
40 Manual Selectable Ride (If Equipped)
2 44 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
2 68 The Instrument Panel Your
2 72 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
2-1
Keys
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-2
yellow blue
Your vehicle has one double sided key for the ignition and all door locks.
Your vehicle may also have a key that locks and unlocks the center floor console only (if equipped).
yellow blue
Door Locks
CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers - especially children - can easily open the doors and fall out. When a door is locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts properly, lock your doors, and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle.
If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to assist you with obtaining replacements.
2-3
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
You can use the keyless entry system (if equipped).
You can also use your key.
Use only the key or the keyless entry transmitter if your vehicle is equipped with the content theft deterrent system and the system is on.
From the inside, to lock the door, slide the lever rearward. To unlock the door, slide the lever forward.
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this power door lock switch, press the raised side of the switch, marked “L” on either front door to lock all the doors at once.
yellow blue
Press the recessed side of the switch marked “U” to unlock all the doors at once.
2-4
If your vehicle has this power door lock switch, press the bottom of the switch on either front door to lock all the doors at once.
Press the top of the switch to unlock all the doors at once.
The power door locks will operate at any time without the ignition being on.
The power door locks will also automatically lock when the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). To unlock the doors, refer to the instructions listed previously. The automatic locking feature can be disabled, if you prefer.
See your dealer for assistance.
Operating the power locks may interact with the theft deterrent system (if equipped). See “Content
Theft Deterrent” in the Index.
yellow blue
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an auto lock/unlock feature which enables you to program your power door locks. The following instructions detail how to program your door locks.
To enter the program mode you need to:
1. Pull back on the the turn signal/multifunction lever all the way toward you and hold it while you perform the next step.
2. Beginning with the ignition in OFF, turn your key to
ON. Return it to OFF and turn to ON again. Then return it to OFF. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch lock and unlock.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door locks. You will have ten seconds to program once you release the turn signal/multifunction lever.
The following is a list of the available programming options:
D Press the lock side of the lock switch on the driver’s side door panel once to turn on the automatic door lock feature. All doors lock. No doors will unlock.
2-5
D Do the same twice to turn off the automatic door lock feature. No doors will lock or unlock. Auto unlocking will not work if auto locking is turned off.
D Press the unlock side of the lock switch on the door panel once to unlock the driver’s door and lock all other doors.
D Do the same twice to unlock all the doors. All doors lock and unlock. (This is the factory setting).
D Do the same three times to turn off the automatic door lock feature. No doors will lock or unlock.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the ignition to ON.
The automatic lock feature will lock all the doors when the vehicle speed is greater that 15 mph (24 km/h) for two seconds. Your vehicle left the factory programmed to have all the doors unlock once the key is removed from the ignition and lock when vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h). See your dealer for more information.
If the lock/unlock switches are not pressed while in the programming mode, the respective auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
yellow blue
Lockout Prevention
To protect you from locking your key in the vehicle, this feature stops the power door locks from locking when the keys are in the ignition and a door is open.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the driver’s door will unlock.
Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 100 feet (30 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2-6
This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
D Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather.
D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
D Check to determine if battery replacement or resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions that follow.
D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.
yellow blue
Operation
UNLOCK: Pressing this button once will unlock the driver’s door. The parking lamps will flash and the interior lights will come on. Pressing UNLOCK again within three seconds will cause the remaining doors to unlock. The parking lamps will flash and the interior lights will come on.
LOCK: Pressing this button once will lock all of the doors. Press LOCK again within three seconds and the horn will chirp.
Operating the keyless entry transmitter may interact with the theft deterrent system. See “Content Theft
Deterrent” in the Index.
Remote Panic Alarm
When the button with the horn symbol on the key transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.
This can be turned off by pressing the horn button again, waiting for 30 seconds, or starting the vehicle.
2-7
Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it’s probably time to change the battery.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter: yellow blue
2-8
1. Insert a dime in the slot between the covers of the transmitter housing near the key ring hole. Remove the bottom by twisting the dime.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+) side up.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the security method used by this system. The transmitter does not send the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver will not respond to a signal that has been sent previously. This prevents anyone from recording and playing back the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your vehicle and press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter at the same time for seven seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your dealer for service.
yellow blue
Rear Access Door (Extended Cab)
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear access door that allows easier access to the rear area of the extended cab.
To open a rear access door from the outside, first open the front door. Then, use the handle located on the front edge of the rear access door to open it.
You must fully close a rear access door before you can close the front door.
2-9
Tailgate
To open a rear access door from the inside, the front door must be opened first.
Then, use the handle located on the inside of the rear access door to open it.
You can open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling the tailgate toward you.
To shut the tailgate, firmly push it upward until it latches.
After you put the tailgate back up, pull it back towards you to be sure it latches securely.
yellow blue
Tailgate Removal
The tailgate on your vehicle can be removed to allow for different loading situations. Although the tailgate can be removed without assistance, you may want someone to assist you with the removal to avoid possible damage to the vehicle.
To remove the tailgate:
1. Raise the tailgate slightly and release both retaining cable clips. To release the retaining cable clips, lift the cable so it points straight out and push the cable clip forward.
2-10
2. With the tailgate at a slight upward angle, pull back on the tailgate at the right edge and then move the tailgate to the right to release the left edge.
Reverse the above procedure to reinstall. Make sure the tailgate is secure.
yellow blue
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves - so don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door, you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking your key out also locks your transmission. Also remember to lock the doors.
If the key is in the ignition, with any door open, and you try to lock your doors with the power door locks, the driver’s door will not stay locked. This will help to keep you from locking your keys in the vehicle.
2-11
Content Theft
-
Deterrent
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Content
Theft Deterrent alarm system.
With this system, the
SECURITY message will flash as you open the door
(if your ignition is off).
yellow blue
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your ignition key? What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your glove box.
D Valuables can be locked in the center floor console.
D If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system, take the transmitter with you.
D Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
This message reminds you to activate the theft deterrent system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter. The SECURITY message should come on and stay on. If using the remote keyless entry transmitter, the door does not need to be open.
3. Close all doors. The SECURITY message should go off after approximately 15 seconds. The alarm is not armed until the SECURITY message goes off.
2-12
If a door is opened without the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for about two minutes, then will turn off to save the battery power.
Remember, the theft deterrent system won’t activate if you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock switch with the door open, or with the remote keyless entry transmitter. You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
D If you don’t want to activate the theft deterrent system, the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed.
D Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm if the system has been armed.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door with the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by placing the key in the ignition and turning it to START.
yellow blue
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open, or with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for the
SECURITY message to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door. This should set off the alarm.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps do not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by an authorized service center.
2-13
Passlock
R
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock theft deterrent system.
Passlock is a passive theft deterrent system. Passlock enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY message flashes, wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart the engine. Remember to release the key from START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine is running and the SECURITY message comes on, you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine off. However, your Passlock system is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time. You may also want to check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index). See your dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index.
New Vehicle “Break
-
In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break in.” But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:
D Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first 500 miles (805 km).
D Don’t drive at any one speed - fast or slow - for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full throttle starts.
D Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings.
D Don’t tow a trailer during break in. See
“Towing a Trailer” in the Index for more information.
yellow blue
2-14
Ignition Positions
You can use your key to turn your ignition switch to five different positions.
yellow blue
LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering wheel and transmission. It’s a theft deterrent feature.
You will only be able to remove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK.
OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering wheel like LOCK. Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for example, if your vehicle is being pushed).
RUN (D): This is the position for driving.
START (E): This starts your engine.
ACCESSORY (A): ACCESSORY lets you use things like the radio, power windows and the windshield wipers when the engine is off. Push in the key and turn it toward you. Your steering wheel will remain locked, just as it was before you inserted the key.
CAUTION:
On manual transmission vehicles, turning the key to LOCK will lock the steering column and result in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you need to turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only to OFF. Don’t press the key release button while the vehicle is moving.
2-15
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.
Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
Key Release Button (Manual Transmission)
The ignition key cannot be removed from the ignition of manual transmission vehicles unless the key release button is used.
yellow blue
To remove the key on manual transmission vehicles, turn the key to OFF, then press the button and turn the key to LOCK. Do not hold the button in while turning the key to OFF. Pull the key straight out.
Retained Accessory Power (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features on your vehicle to continue to work up to 20 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF.
Your radio, power windows and overhead console will work when the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY.
Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF, these features will continue to work for up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened.
2-16
Starting Your Engine
Automatic Transmission
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position - that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transmission
The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down - that’s a safety feature.
yellow blue
Starting Your V8 Engine
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you hold the ignition key in START. When the engine starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2-17
When starting your engine in very cold weather (below
0
_F or 18
_C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START and hold it there. When the engine starts, let go of the key. Use the accelerator pedal to maintain engine speed, if you have to, until your engine has run for a while.
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
yellow blue
2-18
Starting Your V6 Engine
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in
START. If it doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the accelerator pedal all the way down for five more seconds, unless it starts sooner.
yellow blue
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.
When the engine starts, let go of the key and the accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
2-19
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
(
In very cold weather, 0
_F
18
_C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong
110 volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment, near the power steering fluid reservoir.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110 volt AC outlet.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area.
yellow blue
2-20
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, it features an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument panel cluster. This display must be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of PARK (P). This means that if your key is in OFF, rather than LOCK, there will be a small current drain on your battery which could discharge your battery over a period of time. If you have to leave your key in the ignition in OFF for an extended period, it is recommended that you remove the IGN 0 fuse from the instrument panel fuse block. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
yellow blue
PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily.
CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
If you have four wheel drive, your vehicle will be free to roll - even if your shift lever is in
PARK (P) - if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL (N). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear, two wheel high (2H) or four wheel high (4H) or four wheel low (4L) - not in
NEUTRAL (N). See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
2-21
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transmission. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
CAUTION:
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
yellow blue
2-22
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and you’re:
D Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
D Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off road driving. You may want to shift the transmission to
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving, however it offers more power and lower fuel economy than DRIVE (D).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on.
If you manually select SECOND (2) in a light duty automatic transmission, the transmission will drive in second gear. You may use this feature for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
yellow blue
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the selector lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, the transmission won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage the transmission. Use your brakes or shift into
PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.
On cold days, approximately 32
_F (0_C) or colder, your transmission is designed to shift differently until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. This is intended to improve heater performance.
2-23
Tow/Haul Mode Selector Switch
(Automatic Transmission)
Manual Transmission Operation
5-Speed (VORTEC 6000 V8 Engine)
Here’s how to operate your transmission.
yellow blue
Your vehicle is equipped with a tow/haul mode. The selector switch is located on the end of the column shift lever. You can use this feature to assist when towing or hauling a heavy load. See “Tow/Haul Mode” in the
Index for more information.
FIRST (1) is intended only for heavy loads or trailer towing and is not recommended for normal driving.
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle use, start your vehicle moving in FIRST (1). This allows clutch components to break in properly.
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. Shift into FIRST (1) only when the vehicle is below 5 mph (8 km/h). If you try to shift down into FIRST (1) at excessive vehicle speeds, the shift lever will not move into the FIRST (1) position until vehicle speed is reduced.
2-24
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into SECOND (2) when you’re going less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hard to shift into SECOND (2), put the shift lever into NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the clutch.
Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into
SECOND (2). If you try to downshift into SECOND (2) at excessive vehicle speeds, the shift lever will not move into the SECOND (2) position until the vehicle speed is reduced.
THIRD (3): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
THIRD (3). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into the higher forward gears the same way you do for THIRD (3).
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL (N).
yellow blue
NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you start or idle your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, first press down the clutch pedal. Wait for the vehicle to stop moving and then, shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving could damage your transmission.
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, when turning off your engine and parking your vehicle.
2-25
5-Speed (VORTEC 4300 V6 and
4800 V8 Engines)
Here’s how to operate your transmission:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift lever into NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
yellow blue
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL (N).
NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you start or idle your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, first press down the clutch pedal. Wait for the vehicle to stop moving and then, shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving could damage your transmission.
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, when turning off your engine and parking your vehicle.
2-26
yellow blue
Shift Speeds
Shift Light
CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could lose control of your vehicle. You could injure yourself or others. Don’t shift down more than one gear at a time when you downshift.
If you have a manual transmission, you may have a SHIFT light. This light will show you when to shift to the next higher gear for best fuel economy.
If your engine speed drops below 600 RPM, or if the engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to the next lower gear.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions allow.
For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on and off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator.
If your vehicle has four wheel drive and is equipped with a manual transmission, disregard the SHIFT light when the transfer case is in 4 Wheel Low.
Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift.
2-27
yellow blue
Four
-
Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has four wheel drive, you can send your engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four wheel drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the part that follows before using four wheel drive. See the appropriate text for the transfer case in your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Driving in the 4 WHEEL HIGH (4H) or
4 WHEEL LOW (4L) positions for a long time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the life of your vehicle’s drivetrain.
Front Axle Locking Feature
The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the axle to lock or unlock is normal.
Manual Transfer Case (If Equipped)
The transfer case shift lever is on the floor to the right of the driver. Use this lever to shift into and out of four wheel drive.
The 4WD indicator will light up when you shift into four wheel drive and the front axle engages.
Some delay between shifting and the indicator’s lighting is normal.
2-28
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N) can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P), or if you have a manual transmission, even if you are in gear. You or someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL (N). See “Parking
Brake” in the Index.
An indicator on the bezel near the lever shows you the transfer case settings:
2 Wheel High (2H): This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in two wheel drive. This setting also provides the best fuel economy.
4 Wheel High (4H): Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations. This setting also engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle. This is the best setting to use when plowing snow.
NEUTRAL (N): Shift to this setting only when your vehicle needs to be towed. The ignition switch must be in the RUN position in order to shift the lever into
NEUTRAL (N). See “Recreational Vehicle Towing” or
“Towing your Vehicle” in the Index.
4 Wheel Low (4L): This setting also engages your front axle and delivers extra torque. You may never need
4LO. It sends maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose 4LO if you are driving off road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.
2-29
You can shift from 2 Wheel High (2H) to 4 Wheel High
(4H) or from 4 Wheel High (4H) to 2 Wheel High (2H) while the vehicle is moving. Your front axle will engage faster if you take your foot off of the accelerator for a couple of seconds after you shift. In extremely cold weather, it may be necessary to stop or slow the vehicle to shift into 4 Wheel High (4H).
To shift into or out of 4 Wheel Low (4L) or
NEUTRAL (N):
1. Slow the vehicle to a roll, about 1 to 3 mph
(2 to 5 km/h) and shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or with a manual transmission, press the clutch pedal.
2. Shift the transfer case shift lever in one continuous motion.
Don’t pause in NEUTRAL (N) as you shift the transfer case into 4 Wheel Low (4L), or your gears could clash.
Remember that driving in 4 Wheel High (4H) or
4 Wheel Low (4L) may reduce fuel economy. Also, driving in four wheel drive on dry pavement could cause your tires to wear faster and make your transfer case harder to shift and run noisier.
Automatic Transfer Case (If Equipped)
The transfer case switches are located to the left of the instrument panel cluster.
Use these switches to shift into and out of four wheel drive.
yellow blue
2-30
yellow blue
4HI: Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations.
This setting also engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle. This is the best setting to use when plowing snow.
4LO: This setting also engages your front axle and delivers extra torque. You may never need 4LO. It sends maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose
4LO if you are driving off road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.
You can choose among four driving settings:
2HI: This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in two wheel drive. This setting also provides the best fuel economy.
AUTO 4WD: This setting is ideal for use when road conditions are variable. When driving your vehicle in
AUTO 4WD, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s power is sent only to the rear wheels. When the vehicle senses a loss of traction, the system will automatically engage four wheel drive. Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than 2HI.
CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in
NEUTRAL. See “Parking Brake” in the Index.
NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” or “Towing Your
Vehicle” in the Index for more information.
2-31
Indicator lights in the switches show which setting you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service. An indicator light will flash while shifting the transfer case. It will remain illuminated when the shift is complete. If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen setting.
If the SERVICE 4WD light stays on, you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service. See “Service
4WD” in the Index for further information.
Shifting to 4HI or AUTO 4WD
Press and release the 4HI or AUTO 4WD switch. This can be done at any speed (except when shifting from
4LO), and the indicator light will flash while shifting.
It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed.
Shifting to 2HI
Press and release the 2HI switch. This can be done at any speed (except when shifting from 4LO).
yellow blue
Shifting to 4LO
To shift to 4LO, the ignition must be in RUN and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph
(4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4LO switch. You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission in gear.
If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds the transfer case will return to the setting last chosen.
Shifting Out of 4LO
To shift from 4LO to 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph
(4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition in RUN. The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI, AUTO
4WD or 2HI switch. You must wait for the 4HI, AUTO
4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear.
2-32
If the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI, AUTO
4WD or 2HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the transmission is in
NEUTRAL (N).
Shifting to NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL, first make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.
3. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
5. Shift the transfer case to 2HI.
6. Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LO buttons for 10 seconds. The red NEUTRAL light will come on when the transfer case shift to
NEUTRAL is complete.
yellow blue
7. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one second, then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D) for one second.
8. Turn the ignition to OFF.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
10. Release the parking brake prior to towing.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift out of NEUTRAL:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn the ignition to RUN with the engine off.
3. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift position (2HI, 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 4LO).
4. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL the red light will go out.
5. You may start the engine and shift the transmission to the desired position.
2-33
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will flash. A chime will activate when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moved at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least three seconds.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located above the parking brake pedal, marked BRAKE
RELEASE, to release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released, the brake system warning light will go off.
yellow blue
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
2-34
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. With four wheel drive if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear - not in NEUTRAL (N). If you’re pulling a trailer, see
“Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
yellow blue
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:
D Pull the shift lever toward you.
2-35
D Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear - not in
NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission Only)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. If you have four wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever and your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear - not in
NEUTRAL (N). And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to.
yellow blue
2-36
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
yellow blue
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission” in the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.
Then, move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to the OFF ignition position.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the vehicle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-37
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission Models Only)
CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N) can cause your vehicle to roll even if the manual transmission is in gear. You or someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N). See “Parking Brake” in the Index.
Before you get out of your vehicle, put your manual transmission in REVERSE (R), turn off the engine, and firmly apply the parking brake.
If you are parking on a hill, or if you are pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
Parking Over Things That Burn
CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn.
2-38
yellow blue
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
D Your exhaust system sounds strange or different.
D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
D Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris.
D Repairs weren’t done correctly.
D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle:
D Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO; and
D Have your vehicle fixed immediately. yellow blue
Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked (Automatic Transmission)
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if ever you have to, here are some things to know.
CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place this can happen is a garage. Exhaust - with
CO - can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine running.
Another closed in place can be a blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” in the Index.)
2-39
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Four wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) will allow the vehicle to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear - not in
NEUTRAL (N). Always set your parking brake.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
2-40
yellow blue
Manual Selectable Ride (If Equipped)
The main function of this system is to provide superior ride comfort while trailering or fully loaded, as well as for unloaded driving. This system also helps to provide:
D Improved trailering stability
D Improved handling response when trailering or fully loaded
This button is located on the center of the instrument panel near the radio. Press it to activate the selectable ride setting as desired. An indicator light near the button will illuminate whenever the system is active.
It is recommended to use this system as follows:
D For optimum ride comfort in an unloaded vehicle the button should be out and the indicator light will not be illuminated. This switch position indicates
NORMAL levels of ride control or damping.
D For optimum ride comfort when trailering, fully loaded, driving off road, or when personal preferences demand more control the button should be pressed in with the indicator light illuminated.
This switch position indicates FIRM levels of ride control or damping.
The following guide can also be used to help determine the best setting.
NORMAL: The indicator light will be off when the system is in this setting. Use for normal city and highway driving. Provides a smooth, soft ride when the vehicle is unloaded.
FIRM (Unloaded): Press the switch to activate this setting, the indicator light will illuminate. Use this setting when road conditions or personal preference demand more control. Provides more “feel” or response to the road conditions.
yellow blue
FIRM (Loaded): Press the switch to activate this setting, the indicator light will illuminate. Use this setting to minimize trailer inputs to the vehicle or when the vehicle is fully loaded. This setting is also appropriate for off road driving.
You can select a setting at any time based on road and trailering conditions to provide the best ride and handling. Select a new setting whenever driving conditions change.
Locking Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
2-41
Windows
Manual Windows
Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower manual windows.
Power Windows (If Equipped)
If you have the optional power windows, the controls are located on each of the side doors.
yellow blue
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger window as well. Your power windows will work when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or RUN or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is present. See
“Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.
Press the rear of the switch with the power window symbol on it to lower the window.
Press the front of the switch with the power window symbol on it to raise the window.
The driver’s window also has an express down feature that allows the window to be lowered without holding the switch. Press and hold the rear of the window switch for one second to activate the express down mode. The express down mode can be canceled at any time by pressing the opposite side of the switch. To open the window partway, lightly tap the switch until the window is at the desired position.
2-42
Swing-Out Windows (Extended Cab)
To open a rear swing out window, just flip the latch open and swing the glass out.
yellow blue
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
The tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive.
The latch will catch when the window is fully open and hold the window in the open position.
Sliding Rear Window (If Equipped)
To open the sliding rear window, unlock the latch lever by pushing the lever toward the passenger’s side of the vehicle. Release the lever from the latch plate and slide the window toward the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To close the window, slide the window toward the driver’s side of the vehicle. The latch lever will automatically snap on to the latch plate. Try to open the window without releasing the latch lever to be sure the window is in the locked position.
You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
2-43
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your:
D Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
D Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
D Flash to Pass
D Windshield Wipers
D Windshield Washer
D Cruise Control (If Equipped)
2-44
yellow blue
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself when you release it.
If you move the lever all the way up or down, and the arrow flashes at twice the normal rate, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers may not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, check for burned out bulbs and a blown fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal lever to the off position.
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low to high beam or high to low beam, pull the multifunction lever all the way toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are on, this light on the instrument panel also will be on.
yellow blue
Flash-To-Pass Feature
This feature allows you to use your high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass. It works even if your headlamps are off.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, but not so far that you hear it click.
If your headlamps are off or on low beam, your high beam headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you and the high beam indicator on the instrument panel will come on. Release the lever to turn the high beam headlamps off.
2-45
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band with the wiper symbol on it.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes, hold the band on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The closer to LO, the shorter the delay.
2-46
yellow blue
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away from you to the LO position. For high speed wiping, turn the band further, to HI. To stop the wipers, move the band to the OFF position.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield Washer
There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to your preset speed.
CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.
yellow blue
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, or press the clutch pedal
(if equipped), the cruise control will disengage.
CAUTION:
D Cruise control can be dangerous where you can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So, don’t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
D Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning, and you could lose control.
Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.
2-47
Setting Cruise Control
CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The CRUISE light on the instrument panel will illuminate when the cruise control is engaged.
yellow blue
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake or press the clutch pedal
(if equipped). This, of course, disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can move the cruise control switch from ON to
R/A briefly.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there.
If you hold the switch at R/A briefly, the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the switch at R/A.
2-48
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Press the SET button at the end of the lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
D Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, and then release the switch. To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch to R/A briefly.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
D Press and hold the SET button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
D To slow down in very small amounts, press the SET button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
yellow blue
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may want to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
D Step lightly on the brake pedal.
D Step lightly on the clutch pedal (if equipped).
D Move the cruise control switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
2-49
Exterior Lamps
Your parking lamp and headlamp switch is on the driver’s side of your instrument panel.
Turn the knob clockwise to the parking lamps symbol to manually turn on:
D Parking Lamps
D Sidemarker Lamps
D Taillamps
D License Plate Lamps
D Instrument Panel Lights
2-50
yellow blue
Turn the knob clockwise to the master lamps symbol to turn on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps.
Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn off your lamps and put the system in auto headlamp mode.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor located on the top of the instrument panel in the defroster grille. Be sure it is not covered, or the system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system. The DRL and automatic headlamp system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is off. Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlamp system will stay off until you release the parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it.
Lamps On Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY. To disable the chime, rotate the thumbwheel all the way down. In the automatic mode, the headlamps turn off once the ignition key is in OFF.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will come on when:
D the ignition is on,
D the headlamp switch is in automatic headlamp mode, yellow blue
D the automatic transmission is not in PARK (P),
D the light sensor determines it is daytime and
D the parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on.
The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp system will switch from DRL to the headlamps or the last chosen headlamp setting that was used.
When you turn the headlamp switch off, the headlamps will go off, and your DRL lamps will illuminate, provided it is not dark outside.
To idle an automatic transmission equipped vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking brake. Shifting the transmission into PARK (P) will also allow you to idle the vehicle with the DRL off. The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake or shift the transmission out of PARK (P).
To idle a manual transmission equipped vehicle with the
DRL off, set the parking brake. The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it.
2-51
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
If you have fog lamps, use them for better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking lamps and/or low beam headlamps must be on for your fog lamps to work.
The fog lamp switch is located on the left side of your instrument panel.
The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is turned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after you restart the vehicle, you will need to press the fog lamp switch again.
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp Switch
(If Equipped)
This switch includes wiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified service center to install an auxiliary roof lamp. This switch is located on the center of the instrument panel near the comfort controls.
yellow blue
Press the switch to turn the fog lamps on. Press the switch again to turn them off. An indicator light will glow in the switch when the fog lamps are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps in the dark without turning on your headlamps.
The fog lamps will go off whenever your high beam headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the fog lamps will come on again.
2-52
When the switch wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof mounted lamp, pressing the button will activate the lamp and illuminate an indicator light near the button.
Pressing the button again will turn off the roof mounted lamp.
If your vehicle has this switch, your vehicle may have the Snow Plow Prep Package. For further information see “Snow Plow Prep Package” in the Index.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Intensity Control
The instrument panel intensity control is located to the right of the headlamp switch.
Rotate the thumbwheel up to adjust the instrument panel lights. To turn on the dome lamps (with the vehicle doors closed) rotate the thumbwheel all the way up.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when you remove the key from the ignition. The lights will not come on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is pressed in.
Illuminated Entry
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry feature.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the “out” position. If the DOME OVERRIDE button is pressed in, the lamps will not come on.
yellow blue
Front Reading Lamps (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has reading lamps, press the button located next to the lamp to turn the lamp on. The lamps can be adjusted to point in the direction you want.
Press the button again to turn the lamp off.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open the doors.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by rotating the thumbwheel, located next to the parking/headlamps knob, all the way up. In this position, the dome lamps will remain on whether the doors are opened or closed.
You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located below the parking/headlamp knob, to set the dome lamps to come on automatically when the doors are opened, or remain off. To turn the lamps off, press the button into the “in” position. With the button in this
2-53
position, the dome lamps will remain off when the doors are open. To return the lamps to automatic operation, press the button again and return it to the “out” position.
With the button in this position, the dome lamps will come on when you open a door.
Cargo Lamp
Press the button to turn the cargo lamp on. Press the button again to turn it off.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, reading, glove box, cargo and underhood lamps if they are left on for more than 40 minutes when the ignition is off. This will keep your battery from running down.
Mirrors
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror
yellow blue
A message in the instrument cluster will come on and display CARGO LAMP ON when the cargo lamp is turned on and the ignition key is turned to RUN.
Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare from headlamps behind you after dark. Push the tab away from you for normal daytime operation.
2-54
yellow blue
Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror with Compass (If Equipped)
When on, an electrochromic mirror automatically dims to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror also includes an eight point compass display in the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on, the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle is driven.
Mirror Operation
The right side of the switch located at the bottom of the mirror turns the electrochromic mirror on and off. The
LED, located to the right of the switch, will come on when the electrochromic mirror is turned on. To turn the mirror on, press and hold the MIRROR button for three seconds. The mirror will darken and remain dark until the button is released. To turn the mirror off, press and release the MIRROR button.
2-55
Compass Operation
Press the COMP switch once briefly to turn the compass on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the compass will show two character boxes for approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display the compass heading.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if:
D After five seconds, the display does not show a compass heading (“N” for North, for example), there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item.
D The compass does not display the correct heading and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
yellow blue
In order to calibrate, the letter “C” must be displayed in the mirror compass windows. If “C” is not displayed, push in the “COMP” button for approximately eight seconds or until the letter “C” is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated in one of two ways:
D Drive the vehicle in circles at five mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a direction, or
D Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine and after several turns the compass will become calibrated and will display a direction.
Compass Variance
The compass is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance cross country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance, your compass could give false readings.
2-56
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Press and hold the COMP button, located at the bottom of the mirror, for three seconds until a zone number appears in the display.
2. Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map.
yellow blue
Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature Display
(If Equipped)
When on, an electrochromic mirror automatically dims to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button in, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
The mirror also includes a display in the upper right corner of the mirror face. This can be used as a compass or to indicate outside air temperature.
2-57
Temperature Display
The temperature can be displayed by pressing the TEMP side of the switch. Pressing the TEMP switch once briefly, will toggle the temperature reading on and off.
To alternate the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and Celsius, press and hold the TEMP button for three seconds until the display blinks F
_ and C_.
Press and release the TEMP switch to toggle between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings. After five seconds of inactivity, the display will return to a normal temperature reading.
yellow blue
Press and release the TEMP switch to toggle the temperature display between Fahrenheit or Celsius. If an abnormal reading is displayed, please consult your dealer.
Electrochromic Mirror Operation
The right side of the switch, labeled TEMP and located at the bottom of the mirror, turns the electrochromic mirror on and off. An indicator light, located to the right of the TEMP switch, will come on when the electrochromic mirror is turned on. To turn the mirror on, press and hold the TEMP button for six seconds.
To turn the mirror off, press and hold the TEMP button for six seconds. The indicator light will turn off.
Compass Operation
Press the COMP switch once briefly to turn the compass on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the compass will show two character boxes for approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display the compass heading.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2-58
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if:
D After five seconds, the display does not show a compass heading (“N” for North, for example), there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item.
D The compass does not display the correct heading and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, the letter “C” must be displayed in the mirror compass windows. If “C” is not displayed, push in the “COMP” button for approximately eight seconds or until the letter “C” is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated in one of two ways:
D Drive the vehicle in circles at five mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a direction, or
D Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine and after several turns the compass will become calibrated and will display a direction.
yellow blue
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance cross country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance, your compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Use the COMP button located at the bottom of the mirror.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for three seconds until a zone number appears in the display.
3. Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map.
2-59
yellow blue
Outside Manual Adjust Mirrors
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side of your vehicle and have a clear view of objects behind you.
Some mirrors can be folded in, to enter narrow doorways.
The use of hood mounted air deflectors and add on convex mirror attachments may adversely affect mirror performance.
Camper Type Outside Mirrors (If Equipped)
4. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button in, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
If your vehicle is equipped with camper type mirrors, they can be adjusted so you can have a clear view of objects behind you.
Pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility when towing a trailer.
2-60
Electric Outside Rearview Mirrors
(If Equipped)
The control is located on the driver’s door armrest.
yellow blue
Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror may be convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat.
CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
Move the upper control to the left or right to choose the mirror you want to adjust, then press the arrows on the lower control pad to adjust the mirror.
Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors
(If Equipped)
The outside rearview mirrors with this option feature a defrost mode.
To turn on the defrost feature, press the rear window defogger button. See “Rear Window Defogger” in the
Index for further information.
2-61
Storage Compartments
Your vehicle includes a number of storage compartments for storage of often used items.
Some vehicles have storage areas in the instrument panel. Use these spaces for items such as gloves or small books.
Some models have a storage pocket on each of the front doors.
Some vehicles have a storage area behind the seat.
Glove Box
To open your glove box, pull the lever upward and pull the door downward.
Center Overhead Console (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have an overhead console. The long overhead console has three storage compartments inside it and the short overhead console has one compartment inside it.
yellow blue
Installing a Garage Door Opener
If you have the long overhead console, a garage door opener can be installed in the front overhead compartment.
1. To install the garage door opener, first open the compartment door by pressing the release button forward.
2. Peel the protective backing from the hook and loop patch. Press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener, as close to the center of the opener as possible.
3. Center the garage door opener activation button over the console door button, and press the opener firmly into place.
The pegs inside the compartment door are used to make sure the button on the compartment door will contact the control button on the garage door opener.
2-62
4. Add one peg at a time until the PUSH button on the compartment door will operate the garage door opener, with the compartment door closed, when you press the button marked PUSH.
5. Now, with the yellow blue compartment door closed, press the button marked PUSH again to make sure the garage door opener operates properly.
With the garage door opener positioned properly and the right number of pegs in place, you should only have to press the PUSH button slightly to operate the opener.
6. Adjust the position of the garage door opener and add or remove pegs, as needed, until the opener operates properly.
2-63
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
If you have the long overhead console, the center overhead compartment can be used to store your sunglasses.
To open the center compartment, press the release button located at the rear of the compartment door.
Instrument Panel Cupholder (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a cupholder in the middle of the instrument panel.
yellow blue
Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out.
The rear compartment can be used to store a small item, like a book.
To open the rear compartment, press the release button located at the rear of the compartment door.
2-64
To use the cupholder, pull the cupholder out of the instrument panel.
To close the cupholder, push it back into the instrument panel.
Center Console Storage Area (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a console compartment between the bucket seats.
To open it, insert the console key into the lock and unlock the console. Press the button and swing the console lid open.
The console has a place to store tissues, pens and a clip to hold business cards.
Your console may have a cupholder that swings down for the rear seat passengers to use.
Your vehicle may have a compact disc holder in the console.
yellow blue
Armrest Storage Compartment
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a center armrest storage compartment in the front bench seat.
To open it, fold down the armrest and press the latch handle located at the front of the armrest. Then, let the lid pop up and swing open.
The storage compartment has a cassette/compact disc holder. The holder will store up to six compact disc cases and five cassette tape cases or a total of 11 cassette tape cases.
If not used to store cassette or compact disc cases, the storage area can be used to store a laptop computer.
The storage compartment also has a folding writing table on top of the armrest lid.
To use the writing table, pull the latch at the rear of the table and swing the writing table forward. Use it to hold a pad of paper and a pen.
2-65
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Front Ashtray
The front ashtray is located near the center of the instrument panel. Pull on the bottom of the ashtray door to open it.
NOTICE:
If you store paper or other things that burn in your ashtrays, they could be set on fire by cigarettes or other smoking materials. That could cause a fire and possibly damage your vehicle. Do not store papers and other things that burn in your ashtrays.
yellow blue
To remove the front ashtray, press the retainer spring and pull the ashtray toward you. To replace the ashtray, place the ashtray on the slides at the side of its location in the instrument panel. Then slide the ashtray back to its original position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
NOTICE:
Holding a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it’s heating can make it overload, damaging the lighter and the heating element. Just push the lighter all the way in and let go. When it’s done, it will pop back by itself.
2-66
Accessory Power Outlets
Two auxiliary power outlets are located near the cigarette lighter. Use these outlets to power mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems.
The cigarette lighter is designed to fit only in the receptacle to the right of the accessory power outlets.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You can also swing them out to help block glare at the front and side windows.
Your driver’s side sun visor may have a clip to hold small items, such as maps or a thin notebook. The passenger’s side sun visor may have a vanity mirror.
yellow blue
Cellular Telephone (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be prewired for a cellular telephone.
Please consult your GM dealer or a qualified service center for further information.
OnStar
R
System (Option)
OnStar
R
is a vehicle communications service which may be ordered through your dealer. The following
OnStar services are available 24 hours a day:
D Automatic Notification of Front Air Bag
Deployment
D Emergency Services
D Remote Door Unlock
D Roadside Assistance with Location
D Route Support
D Convenience Services
D Remote Diagnostics
D Hands Free, Voice Activated Cellular Telephone
For more information, contact your dealer.
2-67
The Instrument Panel
-
Your Information System
yellow blue
2-68
A. Dome Lamp Switch
B. Lamp Controls
C. Air Outlets
D. Automatic Transfer Case (If Equipped)
E. Multifunction Lever
F. Instrument Cluster
G. Gearshift Lever (Automatic Transmission)
H. Tow/Haul Selector Switch
I. Audio System
J. Comfort Control System
K. Glove Box yellow blue
L. Passenger Air Bag Off Switch
M. Manual Selectable Ride Control (If Equipped)
N. Ashtray
O. Storage Area or Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)
P. Rear Window Defogger Switch (If Equipped)
Q. Lighter and Auxiliary Power Outlets
R. Parking Brake Release
S. Tilt Lever (If Equipped)
T. Center Instrument Panel Utility Block
U. Hood Release
V. Instrument Panel Fuse Block
2-69
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States Heavy Duty Automatic Transmission version shown, Canada, Light Duty Automatic and
Manual Transmission clusters similar
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically.
2-70
yellow blue
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers
(used in Canada).
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
Press the reset button to toggle between the trip odometer and the regular odometer. Holding the reset button for two seconds while the trip odometer is displayed will reset it.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off, press the reset button.
Engine Hour Meter Display
The odometer can also display the number of hours the engine has run. To display the hour meter, turn the ignition off, press and hold the reset button for at least four seconds. The hour meter will be displayed for up to
30 seconds, or until the ignition is turned on.
yellow blue
Tachometer
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
NOTICE:
On vehicles with a manual transmission, if you operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area, your engine or other parts could be damaged.
Damage to your engine or vehicle caused by operating the engine in the red area isn’t covered by your vehicle warranty. Don’t operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area.
2-71
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly - and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
2-72
yellow blue
Your vehicle has a message center that works along with the warning lights and gages. See “Message Center” in the Index.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will come on for about six seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 20 seconds, then it will flash for about
55 seconds.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come on.
yellow blue
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag modules, the wiring, the passenger air bag suppression circuit and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag system, see “Air Bag” in the Index.
This light will come on when you start your vehicle, and it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out. This means the system is ready.
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle, it means the air bag system may not be working properly. The air bags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle serviced right away if the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.
2-73
AIR BAG OFF Light
When you turn the right front passenger’s air bag off, this light will come on and stay on to remind you that the air bag has been turned off. This light will go off when you turn the air bag back on again. See “AIR BAG
OFF Switch” in the Index for more on this, including important safety information.
CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s air bag is turned off for a person who isn’t in a risk group identified by the national government, that person won’t have the extra protection of an air bag. In a crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group. See “AIR BAG
OFF Switch” in the Index for more on this, including important safety information.
yellow blue
2-74
yellow blue
Voltmeter
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when you have turned off the air bag, it means that something may be wrong with the air bag system.
The right front passenger’s air bag could inflate even though the switch is off.
If your vehicle is a regular cab pickup and this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right front passenger’s position (for example, don’t secure a rear facing child restraint in your vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
If your vehicle is an extended cab pickup and this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right front passenger’s position (for example, don’t secure a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger’s seat) until you have your vehicle serviced.
When your engine is not running, but the ignition is in RUN, this gage shows your battery’s state of charge in DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the condition of the charging system. Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period. This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power.
2-75
You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
Shift Light (If Equipped)
This light is used on some models with manual transmissions.
The SHIFT indicator light will help you get the best fuel economy. See “Shift Light” or “Shift Speeds” in the index for more information.
yellow blue
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will flash when you set the parking brake. The light will flash if the parking brake doesn’t release fully. If you try to drive with the parking brake engaged, a chime will sound when the vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h).
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If it doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
2-76
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.) yellow blue
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
With the anti lock brake system, this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds.
That’s normal.
CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-77
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
Transmission Temperature Gage
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has a heavy duty automatic transmission, you will have a transmission temperature gage.
yellow blue
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is working. During a majority of the operation, the gage will read 210
_F (100_C) or less. If you are pulling a load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to fluctuate and approach the 250
_F (122_C) mark. If the gage reaches the 260
_F (125_C) mark, it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
The “Problems on the Road,” section of this manual shows what to do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
When your ignition is on, the gage shows the temperature of the transmission fluid. The normal operating range is from 100
_F (38_C) to about
265
_F (130_C).
At approximately 265
_F (130_C), the message center will display a TRANS FLUID HOT message and the transmission will enter a transmission protection mode.
When the transmission enters the protection mode, you may notice a change in the transmission shifting patterns. The transmission will return to normal shifting patterns when the transmission fluid temperature falls below 260
_F (127_C).
2-78
See “Message Center” in the Index for further information.
If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures of approximately 275
_F (135_C) or greater, the message center will display a TRANS HOT...IDLE ENG warning message. Pull the vehicle off the roadway when it is safe to do so. Set the parking brake, place the transmission in
PARK (P) and allow the engine to idle until the transmission temperature falls below 260
_F (127_C). If the transmission continues to operate above 265
_F
(130
_C), please contact your nearest dealer or the GM
Roadside Assistance Center.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with the transmission temperature gage above the normal operating range, you can damage the transmission. This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered under your warranty.
yellow blue
The following situations can cause the transmission to operate at higher temperatures:
D Towing a trailer
D Hot outside air temperatures
D Hauling a large or heavy load
D Low transmission fluid level
D High transmission fluid level
D Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary transmission oil cooler (if equipped).
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on a frequent basis, see “Scheduled Maintenance” in the
Index for the proper transmission maintenance intervals.
2-79
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission control systems.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while, your emission controls may not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty.
This system is called OBD II (On Board
Diagnostics Second Generation) and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
NOTICE:
Modifications made to the engine, transmission, exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria
(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON light to come on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
yellow blue
2-80
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
D Light Flashing - A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.
D Light On Steady - An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle:
D Reducing vehicle speed.
D Avoiding hard accelerations.
D Avoiding steep uphill grades.
D If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
yellow blue
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see
“If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
2-81
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may notice this as stalling after start up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions, change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed.
yellow blue
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
SERVICE ENGINE SOON light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on board diagnostic) system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving. This may take several days of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to prepare the vehicle for inspection.
2-82
Oil Pressure Gage
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi
(pounds per square inch) when the engine is running.
Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible. See “Check Eng Oil Pressure” and “Engine
Oil” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty.
2-83
Cruise Light (If Equipped)
The CRUISE light comes on whenever you set your cruise control. See “Cruise
Control” in the Index.
yellow blue
Tow/Haul Light (Automatic
Transmissions Only)
This message is displayed when the tow/haul mode has been activated.
4WD Light (If Equipped)
The 4WD indicator will light up when you shift a manual transfer case into four wheel drive and the front axle engages.
Some delay between shifting and the indicator’s lighting is normal.
See “Four Wheel Drive” in the Index for more information.
For more information see, “Tow/Haul Mode” in the Index.
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage will first indicate E (Empty) before you are out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible.
2-84
yellow blue
Here are some situations you may experience with your fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage.
D At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads F (Full).
D It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
D The gage goes back to E (Empty) when you turn off the ignition.
Message Center
The message center is located on the left side of the instrument panel cluster. It gives you important safety and maintenance facts. When you turn the ignition on, the entire center lights up for just a few seconds. As needed, the message center will display one of the following messages. The message center is capable of alternating among different messages if needed.
BATTERY
If this message is displayed when the engine is running, you may have a problem with your charging system.
The battery display will also stay on while the key is in
RUN until the engine is started.
If the message stays on after starting the engine it could indicate a problem with the generator drive belt, or some other charging system problem. Have it checked right away. Driving with this message displayed could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this message displayed, it helps to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and the air conditioner.
2-85
TRANS FLUID HOT
If you have an automatic transmission, you have a transmission temperature warning display contained in the message center.
If the transmission fluid temperature becomes high, the message center will display this message.
yellow blue
The following situations can cause the transmission to operate at higher temperatures:
D Towing a trailer
D Hot outside air temperatures
D Hauling a large or heavy load
D Low transmission fluid level
D High transmission fluid level
D Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary transmission oil cooler (if equipped).
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on a frequent basis, see “Scheduled Maintenance” in the
Index for the proper transmission maintenance intervals.
When the transmission enters the protection mode you may notice a change in the transmission shifting patterns. When the transmission fluid temperature returns to normal, the display will turn off and the transmission shifting patterns will return to normal.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with the transmission TRANS FLUID HOT message displayed, you can damage the transmission.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered under your warranty.
2-86
yellow blue
TRANS HOT...IDLE ENGINE
If you have an automatic transmission, you have a transmission over temperature display contained in the message center.
If this warning message is displayed, pull the vehicle off the roadway when it is safe to do so.
Set the parking brake and place the transmission in
PARK (P). Idle the engine until the message center no longer displays a message. If idling the engine does not turn the warning message off after 10 to 15 minutes, contact your nearest dealer or the GM Roadside
Assistance Center. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with the transmission TRANS HOT...IDLE ENGINE message displayed, you can damage the transmission. This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered under your warranty.
The following situations can cause the transmission to operate at higher temperatures:
D Towing a trailer
D Hot outside air temperatures
D Hauling a heavy load
D Low transmission fluid level
D High transmission fluid level
D Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary transmission oil cooler (if equipped).
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on a frequent basis, see “Scheduled Maintenance” in the
Index for the proper transmission maintenance intervals.
2-87
LOW COOLANT
This message is displayed when the cooling system is low on coolant.
ENGINE OVERHEATED
This message is displayed when the cooling system temperature gets too hot.
yellow blue
The engine may overheat. See “Engine Coolant” in the
Index and have your vehicle serviced as soon as you can.
CHECK COOLANT TEMP
This message is displayed when the cooling system temperature gets hot.
Check the coolant temperature gage and the coolant level. See “Engine Coolant” and “Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage” in the Index. See “Engine
Overheating” in the Index for further information.
2-88
This message will be displayed after the air conditioning system has automatically turned off for the engine coolant protection mode. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index for further information.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
(V8 Engines Only)
This message is displayed when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode.
See “Engine Overheating” in the Index for further information.
CHECK ENG OIL PRESSURE
This message is displayed when the engine oil pressure is low.
See “Oil Pressure Gage” in the Index for more information.
CHECK ENG OIL LEVEL
This message is displayed when the engine oil level is low.
Once oil is added, it may need time to drain and settle in the engine before this message will turn off. It is best to let the engine cool down (if it is hot) or warm up (if it is cold) and cycle the ignition to be sure this message turns off. Refer to the dipstick for the correct level.
See “Engine Oil” in the Index on how to check the oil level and for what type of oil to add.
yellow blue
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
This message is displayed when the engine oil needs to be changed. The message is only displayed for
15 seconds at the start of each ignition cycle.
When you change the engine oil, be sure to reset the
Engine Oil Life Monitor. See “Engine Oil, When to
Change” in the Index.
SECURITY
This message is displayed when the content theft deterrent system has been activated and also monitors the
Passlock
R
System.
If the security message is displayed continuously while driving and stays on, there may be a problem with the
Passlock System. Your vehicle will not be protected by
Passlock, and you should see your GM dealer.
2-89
SERVICE 4WD (If Equipped)
If the SERVICE 4WD message comes on, there may be a problem with the automatic transfer case and service is required.
CARGO LAMP ON
This message is displayed when the cargo lamp is turned on and the ignition key is turned to RUN.
yellow blue
Malfunctions can be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent, which may prevent serious damage to the vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing a malfunction.
LOW WASHER FLUID
This message is displayed when the vehicle is low on windshield washer fluid.
The message is only displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition cycle.
For more information see, “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index.
2-90
LOW FUEL
This message is displayed when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refer to the fuel gage for a better indication of the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
yellow blue
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.
Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
Heater and Air Conditioning Comfort
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
Setting the Clock for Systems with
Setting the Clock for Systems with HR and
3 11 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
3 14 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
3 18 AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
3 22 Remote Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)
3 24 Theft Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
3 26 Understanding Radio Reception
3 26 Tips About Your Audio System
3 27 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
3 28 Care of Your Compact Discs
3 28 Care of Your Compact Disc Player
3-
3-1
Comfort Controls
Standard Comfort Controls
Fan Knob
The knob on the left side of the control panel adjusts the fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob clockwise.
To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise. To turn the fan off, turn the knob to OFF.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area.
Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air.
3-2
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery.
VENT: This setting directs the air through the instrument panel outlets.
BI LEVEL: Air is delivered through the heater floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets.
The air flow can be divided between VENT and
HEATER depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings.
HEATER: This setting directs most of the warmed air through the heater floor outlets, and the rest of the air is divided between the windshield defroster outlets and the side window defroster outlets.
BLEND: Airflow is delivered through the heater floor outlets, the windshield defroster outlets and the side window defroster outlets. The air flow can be divided between HEATER and DEFROST depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings.
DEFROST: This setting directs most air through the windshield defroster outlets, side window defroster outlets and some through the heater outlets.
yellow blue
Heater and Air Conditioning Comfort
Controls (If Equipped)
Fan Knob
The knob on the left side of the control panel adjusts the fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob clockwise.
To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise. To turn the fan off, turn the knob to OFF.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area.
Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air.
yellow blue
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery.
PANEL: This setting directs the air through the instrument panel outlets and the center floor console
(if equipped).
BI LEVEL: Air is delivered through the instrument panel outlets and center floor console outlets
(if equipped) as well as the heater floor outlets. The air flow can be divided between PANEL and HEATER depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings. Pressing the A/C button while in this mode causes cooler air to come out of the instrument panel outlets and center floor console outlets (if equipped) and warmer air to come out of the heater floor outlets.
HEATER: This setting directs most of the warmed air through the heater floor outlets and center floor console outlets (if equipped), as well as some air through the windshield defroster outlets and side window defroster outlets. If air from the center floor console outlets is not desired, turn the vents off at the console.
3-3
yellow blue
BLEND: Airflow is delivered through the heater floor outlets, center floor console outlets (if equipped), the windshield defroster outlets and the side window defroster outlets. The air flow can be divided between
HEATER and DEFROST depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings. The air conditioning compressor may run to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging.
DEFROST: This setting directs most of the air through the windshield defroster outlets, side window defroster outlets and some air through the heater outlets and center floor console outlets (if equipped). If air from the center floor console outlets is not desired or more defroster performance is desired, turn the vents off at the console. When in the DEFROST mode, the air conditioning compressor may run to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging.
OUTSIDE AIR: Press this button to direct the system to use outside air.
Pressing the OUTSIDE AIR button will cancel the
RECIRCULATION button.
RECIRCULATION: Press this button to limit the amount of fresh outside air entering your vehicle.
This is helpful when you are trying to limit odors entering your vehicle, because the air inside the vehicle is being recirculated. Pressing RECIRCULATION will recirculate air continuously.
RECIRCULATION is used when the fan control is OFF to limit odors, outside air and dust from entering your vehicle. All button lights will go off. The last setting selected will activate when the blower is turned back on.
Pressing the RECIRCULATION button will cancel the
OUTSIDE AIR button.
In the BLEND mode, outside air is forced to reduce window fogging. If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed, the LED indicator will flash three times indicating that forced outside air is activated.
The auto recirculation feature will activate when:
D the air conditioning system is activated,
D the OUTSIDE AIR button is on, and
D the vehicle load is high due to city traffic, extended idling or hot weather.
3-4
The system will automatically switch to the recirculation mode to lower the system load and improve interior comfort. The OUTSIDE AIR and RECIRCULATION button LEDs will not change. The system will return to the OUTSIDE AIR function when the system load is reduced.
A/C: Press this button to turn the air conditioning on and off. The system will cool and dehumidify the air inside the vehicle when the A/C light is on.
Air conditioning will be automatically disabled when the outside temperature drops below a level at which air conditioning is ineffective.
Air Conditioning
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot air inside escape. This reduces the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed for the air conditioner to work its best.
The RECIRCULATION button allows the air inside your vehicle to be recirculated. This setting helps to maximize your air conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’s fuel economy. This setting also cools air the fastest and can be used to keep unwanted odors and/or dust from entering the vehicle.
When using the air conditioner, turn off the yellow blue
RECIRCULATION button after the vehicle reaches a comfortable interior temperature. When the right knob on the control panel is between HEATER and
DEFROST, the recirculation feature will not function to reduce window fogging.
The A/C button, below the mode knob, allows the air coming into your vehicle to be cooled. This setting is useful for normal cooling on hot days. When you use
A/C with the RECIRCULATION button pushed in, turn off recirculation as soon as the vehicle reaches a comfortable interior temperature.
Maximum air conditioning performance is obtained by pressing the A/C button, the RECIRCULATION button and turning the temperature knob fully counterclockwise to the blue area. This setting also cools air the fastest.
After the vehicle’s interior reaches a comfortable temperature, press the OUTSIDE AIR button to place the air conditioning system in the normal mode.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has air conditioning, it is equipped with a passenger compartment air filter, which filters outside air entering the vehicle. For information on replacing the filter see “Passenger Compartment Air Filter” in the Index.
3-5
Heating
The heater works best if you keep your windows closed while using it. On cold days, use the HEATER or
VENT/HEAT setting with the temperature knob in the red area.
On cold days, approximately 32
_F ( 0
_C) or lower, if your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, you may experience differences in how the transmission shifts until the engine is warm. This feature automatically reduces the time it takes for the engine to reach normal operating temperature and shortens the time it takes the heater to reach full output.
If you use the engine coolant heater before starting your engine in cold weather, 20
_F ( 8
_C) or lower, the heating system will produce warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartment.
The use of an engine coolant heater also reduces the time it takes for the engine to reach normal operating temperature. For more information, see “Engine Coolant
Heater” in the Index.
yellow blue
Defogging and Defrosting
On cool, humid days, use DEFOG to keep the windshield and side windows clear. Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the windshield in extremely humid or cold conditions. Use DEFROST with the temperature knob toward the red area and the fan control turned all the way to the right.
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
If you see lines running across the rear window, you have a rear window defogger. The lines warm the glass.
To turn on the rear window defogger, press this button next to the fan control knob.
The rear window defogger will only work if the ignition is in RUN. For best results, clear the window of as much snow or ice as possible first.
The defogger will shut itself off after several minutes.
If you need additional warming time, press the button again. You can turn the defogger off at any time by pressing the button.
3-6
If your vehicle is equipped with heated outside mirrors, the rear window defogger button will also activate the heated outside mirrors.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals across the defogger grid on the rear window.
NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
yellow blue
Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater or the air conditioning fan is running, unless you have the
RECIRCULATION button pushed in. For more information on the RECIRCULATION button, see
“Air Conditioning” earlier in this section.
Your vehicle has air outlets in the center and on the sides of your instrument panel.
Ventilation System
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air through your vehicle. Air will flow through the instrument panel outlets.
Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outside air to the inside of your vehicle when it is moving. With the side windows closed, air will flow into the front air inlet grilles, through the vehicle, and out the air exhaust valves.
You can turn the outlets from side to side or up and down to direct the flow of air. The left driver and passenger outlets on vehicles equipped with air conditioning have shut off knobs. Turn the knob to the left to shut off air flow, to the right to allow air flow.
When you close an outlet, it will increase the flow of air coming out of any outlets that are open. The center outlet does not completely shut off airflow.
3-7
Ventilation Tips
D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater and defroster will work far better, reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
D When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the blower fan all the way to the right for a few moments before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle.
D The use of hood air deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the heating and air conditioning system.
yellow blue
Audio Systems
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Setting the Clock for Systems with
SET Button
Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold the
SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appears on the display. Press and hold the SEEK left arrow until the correct hour appears on the display.
Setting the Clock for Systems with HR and
MN Buttons
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute appears on the display. To display the clock with the ignition off, press RECALL or HR/MN and the time will be displayed for a few seconds. There is an initial two second delay before the clock goes into the time set mode.
3-8
AM-FM Stereo
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume and turn the radio off.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing the recall knob. When the radio is playing, press this knob to recall the station frequency.
yellow blue
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM and FM. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there.
SCAN: Select either AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and press both SEEK buttons to listen to a few seconds of each radio station. SCAN will light up on the display. The radio will automatically SCAN to the next higher station, play that station for a few seconds, then SCAN to the next higher station. Press VOLUME or both
SEEK buttons to stop scanning.
3-9
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press one of the four pushbuttons within five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within five seconds. Whenever you press the same two buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
yellow blue
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease bass.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
3-10
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume and turn the radio off.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this knob to recall the station frequency.
yellow blue
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
21 stations (seven AM, seven FM1 and seven FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press one of the four pushbuttons within five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-11
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within five seconds. Whenever you press the same two buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
P.SCAN: Select either AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and press both SEEK buttons to scan through each of your preset stations. The system will scan through and play each preset station stored on your pushbuttons for a few seconds. Press either SEEK button or RECALL to stop scanning through the preset stations.
yellow blue
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease bass.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
3-12
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
Once the tape is playing, use the knobs for VOLUME,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB just as you do for the radio.
REV: Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the cassette tape. Press the SEEK right arrow to stop reversing the tape.
FWD: Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the cassette tape. Press the SEEK left arrow to stop forwarding the tape.
RECALL: Press this knob to switch tape sides.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape or stop the tape and play the radio.
yellow blue
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display -- to show the indicator was reset.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot.
3. Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and
FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds.
The tape symbol on the display will flash, showing that the cut tape detection feature is no longer active.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed.
3-13
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
PWR VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is capable of being rotated continuously.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press this button to recall the station frequency.
yellow blue
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
3-14
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station until you press the button again. The sound will mute while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return and the tone you selected will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
yellow blue
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then press
P. SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press
P. SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen to a specific preset station. P. SCAN will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in, the radio display will show the channel number (P1 P6) for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go blank.
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them.
3-15
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the button, the selection will switch to one of the preset settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W
(Country/Western) or JAZZ. To return to the manual mode, press and release this button until the AUTO
TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. If a
BASS or TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS to program
AUTO TONE.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them.
3-16
yellow blue
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press
EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape.
If the ignition is on but the radio is off, the tape will begin playing.
Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio. The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the display whenever a tape is being played.
Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected for play first.
The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is metal or CrO
2
and adjusts for best playback sound.
PREV (1): Press the PREV button or the SEEK left arrow to search for the previous selection. A minimum three second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation.
PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side of the tape to the other.
NEXT (3): Press the NEXT button or the SEEK right arrow to search for the next selection. A minimum three second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation. The sound will mute while searching for the next selection.
REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV again. The radio will play the last selected station while reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink during the reverse operation.
D (5): Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise.
The double D symbol will appear on the display while the player is in this mode.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the tape to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD again.
The radio will play the last selected station while forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink during the forward operation.
yellow blue
AM FM: Press this button to switch from a tape to the radio.
TAPE AUX: Press this button to return to the tape player when playing the radio. The lighted arrow will appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in the active mode.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape.
The radio will now play. EJECT can be used with either the ignition or radio off. To load a cassette tape with the ignition or radio off, press EJECT before loading the cassette.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display -- to show the indicator was reset.
3-17
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will power up the radio and begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed.
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
PWR VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn this knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is capable of rotating continuously.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press this button to recall the station frequency.
yellow blue
3-18
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
yellow blue
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station until you press the button again. The sound will mute while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return and the tone you selected will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-19
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons.
Select either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then press
P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons.
Press P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen to a specific stored station. P.SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in, the radio display will show the channel number (P1 P6) for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go blank.
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them.
3-20
yellow blue
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the button, the selection will switch to one of the preset settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W
(Country/Western) or JAZZ. To return to the manual mode, press and release this button until the AUTO
TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. If a
BASS or TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS to program
AUTO TONE.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them.
Playing a Compact Disc
PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on.
(Please note that you can also turn the system on when you insert a compact disc into the player with the ignition on.)
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and the disc should play. CD and a CD symbol will also appear on the display. Anytime you are playing a CD, the letters
CD will be next to the CD symbol.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the display, it could be that:
D You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc should play when the road gets smoother.)
D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and try again.)
D The disc player is very hot.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.
yellow blue
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to search for the previous selection. If you hold this button or press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
Sound is muted in this mode.
RDM (2): Press this button to play the tracks on the disc in random order. While in the RDM mode, RANDOM appears on the display. Press RDM again to return to normal play.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to search for the next selection. If you hold this button or press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
The next track number will appear on the display. Sound is muted in this mode.
REV (4): Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at high speed while you press the REV button. This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired selection. Release REV to resume playing.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance rapidly within a track. You will hear the disc selection play at high speed while you press the FWD button. This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired selection. Release FWD to resume playing.
3-21
yellow blue
Remote Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing.
Press it again within five seconds to see how long the
CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is displayed in minutes and seconds. The track number will also appear when a new track begins to play. Press
RECALL again to return to the time display.
AM FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to stop playing the CD and play the radio. The CD symbol will still display but the word CD will be replaced with either AM, FM1 or FM2. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped.)
CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio when a disc is playing, press the AM FM button. To return to the player, press CD AUX. When a disc is playing, the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear on the display. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped.)
EJECT: Press this button to eject the disc from the player and play the radio. When the same or a new disc is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one. If a compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in. The radio will continue playing. When the ignition is off, press this button to load a CD.
3-22
If you have this option, you can play one compact disc
(CD) at a time.
To load a CD into the player, hold the disc with the label side up and insert it carefully into the player (approximately halfway). The disc will automatically be pulled into the player. If the radio is off and the ignition is on when a CD is inserted, the radio will turn on and begin playing the CD. It is possible to load and unload CDs with the ignition off. To load a disc with the ignition off, press the EJECT button on the remote player and then insert the disc. To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player.
A disc that has been ejected but is still sitting in the remote CD player will be pulled back into the player after approximately 30 seconds. This protects the disc and player from damage. The disc will not start playing.
To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player.
All of the compact disc functions are controlled by the radio buttons except for EJECT. When a disc is in the player, a CD symbol will appear on the display. When a disc is playing, the letters CD will appear next to the CD symbol in the bottom left corner. The track number will also be displayed.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the display, it could be that:
D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D There’s too much moisture in the air. (Wait about an hour and try again.)
D You are driving on a very rough road.
Please contact your dealership if any error recurs or cannot be corrected.
PREV (1): Press this button to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played.
Press PREV again to go to the previous track on the disc.
NEXT (3): Press this button to advance to the next track on the disc.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track. As the CD reverses, elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track. As the CD advances, elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.
yellow blue
SEEK: Press the left arrow while playing a CD to go back to the start of the current track. It will go back to the current track if more than eight seconds have played.
Press the left arrow again to go to previous tracks. Press the right arrow to go to the next higher track on the disc.
RANDOM: Press P.SCAN to enter the random play mode. RANDOM will appear on the display. While in this mode, the tracks on the disc will be played in random order. If you press SEEK, PREV or NEXT while in the random mode, the previous or next track will be scanned randomly. Press P.SCAN again to turn off RANDOM and return to normal operation.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is currently playing. Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing.
When a new track starts to play, the track number will also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed.
TAPE AUX: With a disc loaded in the player and the radio playing, press this button once to play the compact disc. To return to playing the radio, press AM FM. If both a cassette tape and CD are loaded, press TAPE
AUX to switch between the tape and compact disc.
EJECT: Press this button on the remote player to eject a compact disc.
3-23
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
THEFTLOCK
R
is designed to discourage theft of your radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate.
Activating the Theft
-
Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure.
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
yellow blue
1. Write down any three or four digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until -- shows on the display. Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down.
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.
8. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code.
9. Press AM FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The
LED indicator by the volume control will begin flashing when the ignition is turned off.
3-24
Unlocking the Theft
-
Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.
5. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on before you can try again. When you try again, you will only have three chances to enter the correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
yellow blue
Disabling the Theft
-
Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.
7. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show --, indicating that the radio is no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the display. The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in this section.
3-25
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to come and go.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
D Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
D Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly.
yellow blue
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle - like a tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone or two way radio - be sure you can add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics radio or other systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units.
3-26
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action, non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).
yellow blue
When using a scrubbing action, non abrasive cleaning cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape.
To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use the following steps.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio on.
3. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
4. Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and
FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds.
The tape symbol on the display will flash, showing that the cut tape detection feature is no longer active.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s recommended cleaning time.
3-27
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non scrubbing action, wet type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own. A non scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non scrubbing action, dry type cleaning cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display -- to show the indicator was reset.
yellow blue
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged. If the mast should ever become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should replace it.
Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the cowl.
3-28
yellow blue
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving.
4 14 Off Road Driving with Your
4 33 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
4 39 Before Leaving on a Long Trip
4 46 Recreational Vehicle Towing
4 54 Camper Wiring Harness (If Equipped)
4 55 Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
4-
4-1
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.) yellow blue
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving task - such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on the floor - makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life.
4-2
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
D Judgment
D Muscular Coordination
D Vision
D Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults - by some estimates, nearly half the adult population - choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws.
yellow blue
The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things:
D The amount of alcohol consumed
D The drinker’s body weight
D The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking
D The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men. yellow blue
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
4-4
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that many people don’t know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking - driver or passenger - is in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious - or even fatal - collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driver who will not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road.
yellow blue
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts - heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking - rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.
yellow blue
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away, your anti lock brake system will check itself. You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with the anti lock brake system, this warning light will stay on.
See “Anti Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in the Index.
4-7
The anti lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions.
yellow blue
Here’s how anti lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels.
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-8
Remember: Anti lock doesn’t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti lock brakes.
Using Anti
-
Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you. You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this is normal. On vehicles with four wheel drive, your anti lock brakes work at all times - whether you are in two wheel drive or four wheel drive.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti lock, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort.
yellow blue
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems - steering and acceleration - have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.
4-9
yellow blue
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking - if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s the time for evasive action - steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available.
4-10
An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
Off
-
Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
yellow blue
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents - the head on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
4-11
D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.
Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.
D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity.
D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot.
yellow blue
D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. (Remember that if your right outside mirror is convex, the vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is.)
D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle.
D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.
4-12
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
yellow blue
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues - such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a “mirrored surface” - and slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid.
4-13
Off
-
Road Driving with Your
Four
-
Wheel
-
Drive Vehicle
This off road guide is for vehicles that have four wheel drive.
Also, see “Anti Lock Brakes” in the Index.
If your vehicle doesn’t have four wheel drive, you shouldn’t drive off road unless you’re on a level, solid surface.
Off road driving can be great fun. But it does have some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself.
“Off roading” means you’ve left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t marked. Curves aren’t banked. There are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill.
In short, you’ve gone right back to nature.
Off road driving involves some new skills. And that’s why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help make your off road driving safer and more enjoyable.
If you think you will need some more ground clearance at the front of your vehicle, you can easily remove the front bumper lower air dam.
yellow blue
The front bumper lower air dam is held in place by a series of push pins located around the lower edge of the front bumper. The push pins are accessible from underneath the front bumper.
4-14
The following steps must be performed on each of the push pins to remove the air dam:
1. Insert the blade portion of a flat blade screwdriver into the push pin slot and pull downward until the push pin snaps loose.
yellow blue
2. While continuing to pull downward on the push pin, squeeze and rotate the expandable end of the push pin with a pair of pliers until it releases from the retainer.
4-15
4-16
3. Pull the push pins and lower air dam assembly away from the retainers until the lower air dam is free.
When you’re back on roads, though, be sure to replace the air dam.
yellow blue
NOTICE:
Operating your vehicle for extended periods without the front bumper lower air dam installed can cause improper air flow to the engine and may allow things like fog lamps or tow hooks on the front of your vehicle to be damaged. Always be sure to replace the front bumper air dam when you’re finished off road driving.
To replace the lower air dam:
1. Line up each push pin with it’s intended retainer and push the washer portion of the push pin towards the retainer until it locks into place yellow blue
2. Push the flat end of the push pin towards the retainer until it locks into place, making sure each is secure.
4-17
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done. Check to make sure all underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly attached. Be sure you read all the information about your four wheel drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What are the local laws that apply to off roading where you’ll be driving?
If you don’t know, you should check with law enforcement people in the area. Will you be on someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle.
D The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward as you can.
D Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on the off road terrain doesn’t toss things around.
CAUTION:
D Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop. You or your passengers could be injured. Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks.
D Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain. You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo properly.
D Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s center of gravity, making it more likely to roll over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof.
Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible.
You’ll find other important information in this manual.
See “Vehicle Loading,” “Luggage Carrier” and “Tires” in the Index.
4-18
yellow blue
Environmental Concerns
Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation. However, it also raises environmental concerns. GM recognizes these concerns and urges every off roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment:
D Always use established trails, roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
D Avoid any driving practice that could damage the environment - shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses - or disturb wildlife (this includes wheel spinning, breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground).
D Always carry a litter bag . . . make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving.
D Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted), camp stoves and lanterns.
D Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
yellow blue
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route.
You are much less likely to get bad surprises. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads.
It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know how to use it properly.
4-19
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off road driving does require some new and different driving skills. Here’s what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands, feet and body, you’ll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off road driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep in mind. At higher speeds:
D you approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles.
D you have less time to react.
D you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles.
D you’ll need more distance for braking, especially since you’re on an unpaved surface.
CAUTION:
When you’re driving off road, bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position. This could cause you to lose control and crash. So, whether you’re driving on or off the road, you and your passengers should wear safety belts.
yellow blue
4-20
Scanning the Terrain
Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features. Here are some things to consider.
Surface Conditions. Off roading can take you over hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering, acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on, you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking distances.
Surface Obstacles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle you if you’re not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:
D Is the path ahead clear?
D Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
D Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? (There’s more discussion of these subjects later.)
D Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly?
yellow blue
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you’re not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even with one or two wheels, you can’t control the vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s especially important to avoid sudden acceleration, sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what isn’t.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road. And this is certainly true for off road driving.
At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a serious - or even fatal - accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.
4-21
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off road driving often takes you up, down or across a hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t do.
There are some hills that simply can’t be driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive down them, you can’t control your speed. If you drive across them, you will roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt about the steepness, don’t drive the hill.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one of those hills that’s just too steep to climb, descend or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top.
4-22
yellow blue
On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill.
D Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply steeper in places?
D Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the surface cause tire slipping?
D Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you won’t have to make turning maneuvers?
D Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
D What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an embankment, a drop off, a fence? Get out and walk the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way to find out.
D Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you need to take some special steps.
D Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel.
D Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed. Don’t use more power than you need, because you don’t want your wheels to start spinning or sliding.
D Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to find another route.
CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous. You could lose traction, slide sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills, always try to go straight up.
yellow blue
D Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill.
D Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
D Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you’re there.
D Use your headlamps even during the day. They make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can cause an accident. There could be a drop off, embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You could be seriously injured or killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
4-23
Q:
What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and I can’t make it up the hill?
A:
If this happens, there are some things you should do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here’s what you should do:
D Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake.
D If your engine is still running, shift the transmission to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
D If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) (or, shift to NEUTRAL (N) if your vehicle has a manual transmission) and restart the engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in REVERSE (R).
D As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down. It’s best that you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover.
4-24
yellow blue
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or are about to stall, when going up a hill.
D Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) (or depressing the clutch, if you have a manual transmission) to “rev up” the engine and regain forward momentum. This won’t work.
Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly back straight down.
D Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up the hill, you must back straight down the hill.
yellow blue
Q:
Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the hill and decide I just can’t do it. What should
I do?
A:
Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) (or the manual transmission in
FIRST (1)) and turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N) when you leave the vehicle.
Leave it in some gear.
CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N) can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P) (or, if you have the manual transmission, even if you’re in gear). This is because the NEUTRAL (N) position on the transfer case overrides the transmission. You or someone else could be injured. If you are going to leave your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift the transmission to PARK (P) (or, put your manual transmission in FIRST (1)). But do not shift the transfer case to the NEUTRAL (N) position. Leave the transfer case in the 2 Wheel
High, 4 High or 4 Low position.
4-25
yellow blue
Driving Downhill
When off roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to consider a number of things:
D How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain vehicle control?
D What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard packed dirt? Gravel?
D Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?
Logs? Boulders?
D What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes and they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause loss of control and a serious accident. Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control.
Q:
Are there some things I should not do when driving down a hill?
A:
Yes! These are important because if you ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident.
D When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across.
You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down.
D Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal depressed in a manual shift. This is called “free wheeling.”
Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade.
4-26
Q:
Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A:
It’s much more likely to happen going uphill. But if it happens going downhill, here’s what to do.
D Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
D Shift to PARK (P) (or to NEUTRAL (N) with the manual transmission) and, while still braking, restart the engine.
D Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake, and drive straight down.
D If the engine won’t start, get out and get help.
yellow blue
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are some things to consider:
D A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across. When you go straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels) reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end. But when you drive across an incline, the much more narrow track width (the distance between the left and right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels.
This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover.
D Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.
4-27
D Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
yellow blue
Q:
What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill. What should I do?
A:
If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface is like before you drive it.
CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that’s too steep will make your vehicle roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline, don’t drive across it. Find another route instead.
4-28
yellow blue
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline, be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over, you’ll be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels won’t get good traction. You can’t accelerate as quickly, turning is more difficult, and you’ll need longer braking distances.
It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud - the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating and braking. You may want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly when driving on sand. This will improve traction.
4-29
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control.
CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
yellow blue
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles or exhaust pipe, don’t try it - you probably won’t get through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts.
If the water isn’t too deep, then drive through it slowly.
At fast speeds, water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be able to start your engine. When you go through water, remember that when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
Driving in Water
Light rain causes no special off road driving problems.
But heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution.
CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown. If it’s only shallow water, it can still wash away the ground from under your tires, and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over. Don’t drive through rushing water.
See “Driving Through Water” in the Index for more information on driving through water.
4-30
yellow blue
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody, chassis or under the hood. These accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings cleaned and checked. These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure, steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired - by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
4-31
Here are some tips on night driving.
D Drive defensively.
D Don’t drink and drive.
D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you.
D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles.
D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
D In remote areas, watch for animals.
D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50 year old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible.
4-32
yellow blue
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean - inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness - the inability to see in dim light - and aren’t even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
yellow blue
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire to road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and even people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.
4-33
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
4-34
CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally.
yellow blue
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
yellow blue
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your engine. Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly.
4-35
Driving Through Flowing Water
CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be carried away. As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and the other vehicle occupants could drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
D Turn on your low parking lamps
beam headlamps - not just your
- to help make you more visible to others.
D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray.
D Have good tires with proper tread depth.
(See “Tires” in the Index.) yellow blue
4-36
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals.
yellow blue
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
D Know the best way to get to where you are going.
Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip.
D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.
4-37
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-38
yellow blue
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you’re not fresh - such as after a day’s work - don’t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you’ll find experienced and able service experts in GM dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it.
yellow blue
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels?
D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble free trip. Is the tread good enough for long distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure?
D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system?
D Maps: Do you have up to date maps?
4-39
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior.
D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently.
D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
4-40
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. (See “Off Road
Driving” in the Index for information about driving off road.) yellow blue
yellow blue
D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transmission. These parts can work hard on mountain roads.
D Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill.
CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
D Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
D As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
D You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
4-41
Winter Driving
yellow blue
Here are some tips for winter driving:
D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful.
4-42
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about freezing (32
_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
yellow blue
Whatever the condition or loose snow
- smooth ice, packed, blowing
- drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have an anti lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See “Anti Lock” in the Index.
D Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-43
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
yellow blue
D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve been stopped by the snow.
D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats - anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
D Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-44
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help keep CO out.
yellow blue
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes.
4-45
Recreational Vehicle Towing
There may be times when you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for use at your destination. Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed for recreational vehicle towing. Follow the instructions for the towing equipment.
When towing your vehicle, turn the ignition to OFF.
To prevent your battery from draining while towing, remove the IGN 0 fuse from the instrument panel fuse block. Be sure to replace the fuse when you reach your destination. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
yellow blue
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Two wheel drive vehicles, should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground. Two wheel drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed. To properly tow these vehicles, they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground.
In rare cases when it’s unavoidable that a two wheel drive vehicle is to be towed with all four wheels on the ground, the propeller shaft to axle yoke orientation should be marked and the propeller shaft removed following the applicable service manual removal/installation procedure.
Dust or dirt can enter the back of the transmission through the opening created by removing the propeller shaft if proper protection is not provided. Also, check the transmission fluid level before driving the truck.
4-46
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case into NEUTRAL (N) can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P), for an automatic transmission, or if your vehicle is in gear, for a manual transmission. You or others could be injured.
Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL (N).
yellow blue
Use the following procedure to correctly tow your vehicle on all four wheels:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Shift an automatic transmission to PARK (P), or a manual transmission to FIRST (1).
3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle.
4. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See
“Four Wheel Drive” in the Index for the proper procedure to select the neutral position for your vehicle.
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to OFF. The OFF position unlocks the steering column and reduces battery drain as long as the IGN 0 fuse is removed. Unlocking the steering column will allow the proper movement of the front wheels and tires during towing.
4-47
Loading Your Vehicle
The Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver’s door or in the Incomplete Vehicle Document in the cab.
The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
yellow blue
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
The Certification/Tire label also contains information about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity. See “Front
Axle Reserve Capacity” later in this section.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.
CAUTION:
In the case of a sudden stop or collision, things carried in the bed of your truck could shift forward and come into the passenger area, injuring you and others. If you put things in the bed of your truck, you should make sure they are properly secured.
4-48
NOTICE:
Some vehicles may be equipped with RPO VYU
(snow plow prep package). With this option, the payload your vehicle can carry is reduced when a snow plow is installed. Your vehicle can be damaged if either the front or rear axle ratings, or the GVW are exceeded.
As a general guideline, with a 650 lb. (295 kg) snow plow, the weight of the occupants and cargo must not exceed 300 lb. (135 kg). However, this may depend on the vehicle’s option content.
Therefore, to help avoid vehicle damage:
D Make sure the weight on the front and rear axles does not exceed their respective axle ratings.
NOTICE: (Continued) yellow blue
NOTICE: (Continued)
D For the front axle, if more cargo or passengers need to be carried, appropriate counter ballast must be installed rear of the rear axle and properly secured.
D Total vehicle weight must not exceed the
GVW rating.
D See your dealer for advice and information about using a snow plow on your vehicle.
CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-49
Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading.
This will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
If you put things inside your vehicle - like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else - they go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
D Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.
D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle.
D When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you need to.
There’s also important loading information for off road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle for
Off Road Driving” in the Index.
yellow blue
4-50
Front Axle Reserve Capacity
This is the difference between your front GAWR and the front axle weight of your truck with full fuel and passengers. It is the amount of weight you can add to your front axle before reaching your front GAWR.
The front axle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be found in the lower right corner of the tire/certification label, as shown in this example.
yellow blue
In order to calculate the amount of weight any front accessory is adding to the front axle, use the following formula.
(W x (A+W.B.)) / W.B.= Weight the accessory is adding to the front axle
Where: W= Weight of added accessory
A= Distance that the accessory is in front of the front axle
W.B.= Vehicle Wheelbase
4-51
For example, adding a 700 lbs. (318 kg) snow plow adds more than 700 lbs. (318 kg) to the front axle.
Using the formula, if the snow plow is 4 ft. (122 cm) in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 10 ft.
(305 cm), then:
W= 700 lbs. (318 kg), A= 4 ft. (122 cm) and W.B.=
10 ft. (305 cm)
(W x (A+W.B.)) / W.B. = (700 x (4ft. + 10 ft.)) /
10 ft. = 980 lbs.
So, if your truck’s front axle reserve capacity is more than 980 lbs. (445 kg), you could add this snow plow without exceeding the front GAWR.
You can add heavier equipment on the front of the vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer passengers, less cargo or by positioning cargo more towards the rear. This has the effect of reducing the load on the front. However, the front GAWR, rear GAWR and the GVWR must never be exceeded.
yellow blue
Total Vehicle Reserve Capacity
This is the difference between your GVWR and the weight of your truck with full fuel and passengers. It is the amount of weight you can add to your vehicle before reaching your GVWR.
The reserve capacity numbers are intended as a guide when selecting the amount of equipment or cargo your truck can carry. If you are unsure of your truck’s front, rear or total weight, go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
This label is inside your glove box. It will tell you if your vehicle can carry a slide in camper, how much of a load your vehicle can carry, and how to correctly spread out your load. Also, it will help you match the right slide in camper to your vehicle.
When you carry a slide in camper, the total cargo load of your vehicle is the weight of the camper, plus
D everything else added to the camper after it left the factory,
D everything in the camper and
D all the people inside.
4-52
The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t include the weight of the people inside. But, you can figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat.
The total cargo load must not be more than your vehicle’s CWR.
Refer to the Truck Camper Loading Information label in glove box for dimensions A and B as shown in the following illustration.
yellow blue
Here is an example of proper truck and camper match:
Use the rear edge of the load floor for measurement purposes. The recommended location for the cargo center of gravity is at point C for the CWR. It is the point where the mass of a body is concentrated and, if suspended at that point, would balance the front and rear.
A. Camper Center of Gravity
B. Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone
The camper’s center of gravity should fall within the center of gravity zone for your vehicle’s cargo load.
You must weigh any accessories or other equipment that you add to your vehicle. Then, subtract this extra weight from the CWR. This extra weight may shorten the center of gravity zone of your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this.
If your slide in camper and its load weighs less than the
CWR, the center of gravity zone for your vehicle may be larger.
4-53
Your dealer can help you make a good vehicle camper match. He’ll also help you determine your CWR.
After you’ve loaded your vehicle and camper, drive to a weigh station and weigh the front and rear wheels separately. This will tell you the loads on your axles.
The loads on the front and rear axles shouldn’t be more than either of the GAWRs. The total of the axle loads should not be more than the GVWR.
Open your driver’s door and look at the
Certification/Tire label to find out your GAWR and GVWR.
If you’ve gone over your weight ratings, move or take out some things until all the weight falls below the ratings. Of course, you should always tie down any loose items when you load your vehicle or camper.
When you install and load your slide in camper, check the manufacturer’s instructions.
If you want more information on curb weights, cargo weights, Cargo Weight Rating and the correct center of gravity zone for your vehicle, your dealer can help you.
Just ask for a copy of “Consumer Information,
Truck Camper Loading.” yellow blue
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch loads from the CWR for your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, so that you won’t go over the GVWR or
GAWR. If you are using a weight distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without the equalizer bars in place.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see “Trailer Towing” in the Index.
Camper Wiring Harness
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with a camper wiring harness see “Trailer Wiring Harness” in the Index for further information.
4-54
yellow blue
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners may consider having the pickup box removed and a commercial or recreational body installed. Before you do so, first contact the GM Customer Assistance Office for your area for information on such conversions specific to this vehicle. (See the “Warranty and Owner
Assistance” booklet for Customer Assistance Office.)
Owners should be aware that, as manufactured, there are differences between a chassis cab and a pickup with the box removed which may affect vehicle safety. The components necessary to adapt a pickup to permit its safe use with a specialized body should be installed by a body builder in accordance with the information available from the Customer Assistance Office.
Towing a Trailer
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well - or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this part, and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
4-55
Your vehicle may be able to tow a trailer. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the
Trailer” that appears later in this section.
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are, it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
D There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police.
yellow blue
D Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh less than the capacity stamped on your step bumper. You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than the capacity stamped on your step bumper. You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
D If you have an automatic transmission, you can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
If you have a manual transmission and you are towing a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH (5) gear.
Just drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a lower gear). See “Tow/Haul Mode” in the Index.
4-56
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
D the weight of the trailer,
D the weight of the trailer tongue
D and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Tow/Haul Mode (If Equipped)
Tow/haul is a feature on automatic transmission equipped vehicles that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. The purpose of the tow/haul mode is to:
D Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
D Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when the vehicle is unloaded.
D Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
Automatic transmission equipped vehicles are provided with a button at the end of the shift lever which when pressed enables tow/haul. When the button is pressed, a light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that tow/haul has been selected. yellow blue
Tow/haul may be turned off by pressing the button again, at which time the indicator light on the instrument panel will turn off. The vehicle will automatically turn off tow/haul every time it is started.
Tow/haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
Tow/haul is most useful under the following driving conditions:
D When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling terrain.
D When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop and go traffic.
D When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in busy parking lots where improved low speed control of the vehicle is desired.
Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However, there is no benefit to the selection of tow/haul when the vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.
Tow/haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
4-57
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Use one of the following charts to determine how much your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Above the 5,000 lbs. (2 268 kg) trailer rating, the handling/trailering suspension is required on C 1500 models and the handling/trailering or off road suspension is required on K 1500 models. The engine oil cooler is required on C/K 2500 models with the
VORTEC 6000 engine. Refer to the Trailering Guide for oil cooler recommendations.
C 1500 (2WD)*
Engine (Trans.) Axle
Ratio
4300 V6 (Auto) 3.08
3.42
3.73
4300 V6 (Manual) 3.08
3.42
4800 V8 (Auto) 3.42
3.73
4800 V8 (Manual) 3.42
3.73
5300 V8 3.42
3.73
Max. Trailer Wt.
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
4,500 lbs. (2 041 kg)
5,000 lbs. (2 268 kg)
3,500 lbs. (1 588 kg)
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
6,000 lbs. (2 722 kg)
7,000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
5,000 lbs. (2 268 kg)
7,000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
8,200 lbs. (3 720 kg)
* Weight distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15% of hitch pulling weight 1,000 lb. (454 kg) maximum.
Fifth wheel hitch tongue weight 15% to 25% of hitch pulling weight 1,500 lb (680 kg) maximum.
yellow blue
4-58
K 1500 (4WD)*
Engine (Trans.) Axle
Ratio
4300 V6 (Auto) 3.42
3.73
4300 V6 (Manual) 3.42
4800 V8 (Auto)
3.73
3.73
4.10
4800 V8 (Manual) 3.73
5300 V8
4.10
3.73
4.10
Max. Trailer Wt.
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
4,500 lbs. (2 041 kg)
3,500 lbs. (1 588 kg)
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
6,500 lbs. (2 948 kg)
7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
4,500 lbs. (2 041 kg)
5,500 lbs. (2 495 kg)
7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
8,000 lbs. (3 629 kg)
* Weight distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15% of hitch pulling weight 1,000 lb. (454 kg) maximum.
Fifth wheel hitch tongue weight 15% to 25% of hitch pulling weight 1,500 lb (680 kg) maximum.
yellow blue
C 2500 LD (2WD)*
Engine
5300 V8
6000 V8
6.5 L Diesel
3.42
3.73
4.10
3.42
Axle
Ratio
3.42
3.73
4.10
Max. Trailer Wt.
6,500 lbs. (2 948 kg)
7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
8,500 lbs. (3 856 kg)
7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
8,500 lbs. (3 856 kg)
10,500 lbs. (4 763 kg)
7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
* Weight distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15% of hitch pulling weight 1,200 lb. (544 kg) maximum.
Fifth wheel hitch tongue weight 15% to 25% of hitch pulling weight 2,000 lb (907 kg) maximum.
4-59
C 2500 HD (2WD)*
Engine
6000 V8
6.5 L Diesel
Axle
Ratio
3.42
3.73
4.10
3.42
4.10
Max. Trailer Wt.
7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
8,500 lbs. (3 856 kg)
10,500 lbs. (4 763 kg)
11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)
11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)
* Weight distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to
15% of hitch weight 1,200 lb. (544 kg) maximum.
Fifth wheel hitch tongue weight 15% to 25% of hitch weight 2,500 lb (1 134 kg) maximum.
yellow blue
K 2500 HD (4WD)*
Engine
6000 V8
6.5 L Diesel
Axle
Ratio
3.73
4.10
3.42
4.10
Max. Trailer Wt.
8,000 lbs. (3 629 kg)
10,000 lbs. (4 536 kg)
10,500 lbs. (4 763 kg)
10,500 lbs. (4 763 kg)
* Weight distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to
15% of hitch weight 1,200 lb. (544 kg) maximum.
Fifth wheel hitch tongue weight 15% to 25% of hitch weight 2,500 lb (1 134 kg) maximum.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
4-60
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
yellow blue
If you’re using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
4-61
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:
D If you use a step bumper hitch, your bumper could be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure you have ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper.
D If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh more than the capacity stamped on your step bumper, be sure to use a properly mounted, weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you’re driving.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. If you have the factory installed trailering package, and for
4-62
yellow blue trailers up to 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg) you may attach the safety chains to the attaching points on the bumper. For heavier trailers, follow the trailer or hitch manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety chains. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) loaded, then it needs its own brakes - and they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.
Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system only if:
D The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
D The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steel brake tubing.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working.
While towing a trailer or when exposed to long periods of sunshine, the floor of the truck bed may become very warm. Avoid putting items in the truck bed that might be affected by high ambient temperatures.
yellow blue
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.
4-63
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
yellow blue
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
If you have an automatic transmission, you can tow in
DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the transmission to
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul Mode” in the Index.
If you have a manual transmission and you are towing a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH (5) gear. Just drive in
FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a lower gear).
4-64
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while parked (preferably on level ground) with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) (or the manual transmission out of gear and the parking brake applied) for a few minutes before turning the engine off.
If you do get the overheat warning, see “Engine
Overheating” in the Index.
Parking on Hills
CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
yellow blue
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet for an automatic transmission, or into gear for a manual transmission.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake and shift into PARK (P) for an automatic transmission, or REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission.
5. If you have a four wheel drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
NEUTRAL (N).
6. Release the regular brakes.
4-65
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
If the transfer case on four wheel drive vehicles is in NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear - not in
NEUTRAL (N).
yellow blue
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you:
D Start your engine;
D Shift into a gear; and
D Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system and brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
4-66
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle is equipped with one of the following wiring harnesses for towing a trailer or hauling a slide in camper.
Basic Trailer Wiring Package
All regular and extended cab pickups have a six wire trailer towing harness.
yellow blue
The six wire harness is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to the vehicle’s frame. The harness requires the installation of a trailer wiring harness connector, which is available through your dealer.
The six wire harness contains the following trailer circuits:
D Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
D Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
D Brown: Taillamps
D White: Ground
D Light Green: Back up Lamps
D Light Blue: Center High
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
Mounted
If you need to upgrade your vehicle to heavy duty trailering, a brake controller harness and an underbody harness with a seven pin universal heavy duty trailer connector are available from your dealer.
4-67
Heavy
-
Duty Trailer Wiring Package (If Equipped)
Your pickup may be equipped with the eight wire trailer towing harness. This harness with a seven pin universal heavy duty trailer connector is attached to a bracket on the platform hitch.*
* The Center High Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) wire is tied next to the trailer wiring harness for use with a trailer, slide in camper or cap.
The eight wire harness contains the following trailer circuits:
D Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
D Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
D Brown: Taillamps
D White: Ground
D Light Green: Back up Lamps
D Light Blue: CHMSL
D Red: Battery Feed
D Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
A jumper harness for an electric trailer brake controller and a trailer battery feed fuse are included with this trailering package. (See“Instrument Panel Jumper
Wiring Harness” later in this section.)
If you need to tow a light duty trailer with a standard four way round pin connector, an adapter connector is available from your dealer.
yellow blue
4-68
yellow blue
Camper/Fifth
-
Wheel Trailer Wiring Package
(If Equipped)
The eight wire camper harness is located under the front edge of the pickup box on the driver’s side of the vehicle, attached to the frame bracket. A connector will have to be added to the wiring harness which connects to the camper.
The eight wire harness contains the following camper/trailer circuits:
D Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
D Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
D Brown: Taillamps
D White: Ground
D Light Green: Back up Lamps
D Light Blue: Center High
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
Mounted
D Red: Battery Feed
D Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
A jumper harness for an electric trailer brake controller and a trailer battery feed fuse are included with this trailering package. (See“Instrument Panel Jumper
Wiring Harness” later in this section.)
If your vehicle is equipped with the “Heavy
Trailering” option, please refer to “Heavy
Duty
Duty Trailer
Wiring Package”, earlier in this section.
When the camper wiring harness is ordered without the heavy duty trailering package, an eight wire harness with a seven pin connector and separate CHMSL connector are located at the rear of the vehicle and are tied to the vehicle’s frame.
4-69
Instrument Panel Jumper Wiring Harness
Auxiliary Battery (If Equipped)
The auxiliary battery provision can be used to supply electrical power to additional equipment that you may choose to add, such as a slide in camper.
If your vehicle has this provision, this relay will be located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle, next to the auxiliary battery.
yellow blue
This harness is included with the heavy duty and camper/fifth wheel trailer wiring packages. The harness is for an electric trailer brake controller and includes a trailer battery feed fuse. This harness and fuse should be installed by your dealer or a qualified service center.
When using this provision, connection should only be made to the upper stud (A) of the relay. Do not make connections to the lower stud (B) of the relay.
The auxiliary battery circuit is protected by a megafuse located behind the auxiliary battery.
Be sure to follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment that you install.
4-70
NOTICE:
When using the auxiliary battery provision, the electrical load must not exceed 30 amps. Always turn off any electrical equipment when not in use.
Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain your battery.
Power Winches
If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only use it when your vehicle is stationary or anchored.
NOTICE:
Using a power winch with the transmission in gear may damage the transmission. When operating a power winch, always leave the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
Use the regular brakes, set the parking brake, or block the wheels to keep your vehicle from rolling.
yellow blue
Step-Bumper Pad
If your vehicle has a rear step bumper, it may be equipped with a rear step pad at the center of the bumper.
If you will be using the bumper to tow a trailer, you must remove the center cutout circle to install the trailer ball.
4-71
yellow blue
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
34 If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
yellow blue
Press the button at the top of the steering column all the way down to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
But they won’t flash if you’re braking.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, press the button until the first click and release.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about
300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
5-2
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. But please use the following steps to do it safely.
CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:
D They contain acid that can burn you.
D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
D They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.
yellow blue
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
The ACDelco
R
battery in your vehicle has a built in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yellow. Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system.
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12 volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
5-3
yellow blue
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL (N). If you have a four wheel drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL (N).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or accessory power outlets. Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it could save your radio!
NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and negative ( ) terminal locations on the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting terminal and a remote negative ( ) jump starting terminal. The remote positive (+) terminal is located behind a red plastic cover near the engine accessory drive bracket. To uncover the remote positive (+) terminal, open the red plastic cover.
On all V8 engines, the remote negative ( ) terminal is located on the engine accessory drive bracket. This is marked “GND” on V8 engines. On V6 engines, the remote negative ( ) terminal is located on a tab attached to the engine accessory drive bracket where it is marked “GND”.
You should always use the remote positive (+) and the remote negative ( ) terminals instead of the positive (+) and negative ( ) terminals on your battery.
5-4
CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t need to add water to the ACDelco
R
battery installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.
yellow blue
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative ( ) will go to a metal engine part or a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one. Don’t connect positive (+) to negative ( ) or you’ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too.
On vehicles equipped with dual batteries, make all battery connections to the remote positive (+) and remote negative ( ) terminals.
CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.
5-5
5-6
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
yellow blue
8. Now connect the black negative ( ) cable to the good battery’s negative ( ) cable. Use a remote negative ( ) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Don’t let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative ( ) cable doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy unpainted metal part of the vehicle with the dead battery or to a remote negative ( ) terminal if the vehicle has one.
yellow blue
V8 Engine V6 Engine
9. When connecting the cable, be sure it is not near any engine parts that will move.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for awhile.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch each other or any other metal.
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
5-7
Towing Your Vehicle
CAUTION:
To help avoid serious personal injury to you or others:
D Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is being towed.
D Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
D Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured.
D Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by the tow truck.
D Always secure the vehicle on each side with separate safety chains when towing it.
D Use only the correct hooks. yellow blue
NOTICE:
Use the proper towing equipment to avoid damage to the bumper, fascia or fog lamp areas of the vehicle.
With current trends in automotive styles and design, it is essential that the correct towing equipment is used to tow a vehicle. Your vehicle can be towed with wheel lift equipment or car carrier equipment. Two Wheel Drive vehicle towing limits for wheel lift equipment are as follows:
D Front Towing --
50 miles (80 km)
35 mph (55 km/h) for
D Rear Towing - 55 mph (88 km/h) or legal speed limit. The distance is unlimited.
5-8
Four Wheel Drive vehicles must have the transfer case in NEUTRAL (N). See “Four Wheel Drive” in the
Index for the proper procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for your vehicle. The towing limits for four wheel drive vehicles with wheel lift equipment:
D Front Towing - 55 mph (88 km/h) or legal speed limit and distance is unlimited
D Rear Towing - 55 mph (88 km/h) for
50 miles (80 km).
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside
Assistance” in the Index.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See “Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage” in the Index. In addition, you will find a LOW COOLANT, CHECK COOLANT TEMP,
ENGINE OVERHEATED and a REDUCED ENGINE
POWER message in the message center on the instrument panel. See “Message Center” in the Index.
yellow blue
Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode (V8 Engines Only)
Should an overheated engine condition exist and the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine performance.
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided.
NOTICE:
After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil life monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
5-9
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. See “Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.
yellow blue
5-10
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
D Climb a long hill on a hot day.
D Stop after high speed driving.
D Idle for long periods in traffic.
D Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.
yellow blue
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner and it’s on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving - DRIVE (D) for automatic transmissions.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the
engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” listed previously in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away.
5-11
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what you’ll see: yellow blue
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at or above the FILL COLD mark. If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it cools down.
5-12
CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index.
yellow blue
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you use only DEX COOL
R
(silicate free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner - at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL
R
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down.
If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
5-13
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn’t at or above the FILL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX COOL
R coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. (See “Engine Coolant” in the
Index for more information.)
CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap - even a little - they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
5-14
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX COOL
R
coolant.
NOTICE: yellow blue
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
So use the recommended coolant.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-15
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise (left) about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and remove it.
3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture, to the FILL COLD mark.
5-16
yellow blue
yellow blue
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FILL COLD mark.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight.
5-17
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages. So you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially disengages.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: yellow blue
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop - well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard warning flashers.
5-18
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in PARK (P) or shift a manual transmission to FIRST (1) or
REVERSE (R).
3. If you have a four wheel drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear - not in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire.
5-19
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
Regular Cab
5-20
Extended Cab yellow blue
yellow blue
The equipment you’ll need is behind the passenger’s seat.
1. If there is a cover, move the seats forward and turn the wing nut on the cover counterclockwise to remove it.
2. The wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer can be removed by turning the wing nut counterclockwise.
3. To release the bottle jack from it’s holder, turn the knob on the bottle jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head slightly.
4. There is also a wing nut used to retain the storage bag and tools. To remove it, turn the wing nut counterclockwise.
You’ll use the jack handle and the wheel wrench to remove the underbody mounted spare tire.
A. Hoist Assembly
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Extensions
D. Hoist Shaft
E. Valve Stem,
Pointed Down
F. Spare Tire
G. Tire Retainer
H. Hoist Cable
I. Hoist Lock
J. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
K. Hoist End
5-21
yellow blue
Follow these instructions to lower the spare tire:
1. If the vehicle is equipped with a hoist lock, open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper and use the ignition key to remove the lock.
2. Assemble the wheel wrench and the two jack handle extensions as shown. Insert the hoist end (open end) of the extension through the hole in the rear bumper.
Be sure the hoist end of the extension connects into the hoist shaft.
3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle. The wheel wrench has a hook that allows you to pull the hoist cable towards you, to assist in reaching the spare tire.
4. When the tire has been lowered, tilt the retainer at the end of the cable so it can be pulled up through the wheel opening.
5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
The tools you’ll be using include the bottle jack (A), the wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
If the flat tire is on the rear of the vehicle, you’ll need to use both jack handle extensions.
5-22
yellow blue
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle extensions
(as needed). Attach the jack handle to the jack.
Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack lift head a little.
5-23
If your vehicle has wheel nut caps, loosen them by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. If you have a center cap with wheel nut caps, the wheel nut caps are designed to remain with the center cap.
yellow blue
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
1. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove the wheel nuts yet.
Remove the center cap.
If the wheel has a smooth center piece, place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry out.
5-24
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
2. Position the jack under the vehicle. If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle (2 Wheel Drive
1500 Series vehicles), position the jack under the bracket attached to the vehicle’s frame, behind the flat tire. If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle
(All other models), position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire.
If the flat tire is on the rear, position the jack under the rear axle between the spring anchor and the shock absorber bracket.
If you have added a snow plow to the front of your vehicle, lower the snow plow fully before raising the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.
5-25
5-26
Front Position 2WD 1500 Series
Front Position All Other Models yellow blue
Rear Position
3. Make sure the jack head is positioned so that the rear axle is resting securely between the grooves that are on the jack head. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit.
yellow blue
4. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
5. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel.
5-27
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident.
6. After mounting the spare, replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each wheel nut by hand using the wheel wrench until the wheel is held against the hub.
yellow blue
5-28
yellow blue
Front Position 2WD 1500 Series Front Position All Other Models
5-29
Rear Position
7. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
8. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise.
5-30
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque. See “Capacities and
Specifications” in the Index.
yellow blue
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.
Return the bottle jack, wheel blocks, wheel wrench and jack extensions to their location behind the passenger’s seat. Secure the items in the vehicle as shown.
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification.
5-31
A. Wing Nut
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wheel Wrench and
Extensions Retainer
D. Gloves
E. Wheel Wrench and
Extensions
F. Storage Bag
G. Bottle Jack Holder
H. Bottle Jack
I. Wheel Block
Retainer
Store the flat tire where the spare tire was stored.
5-32
yellow blue
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire carrier. To store the tire:
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed downward and to the rear.
2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel opening. Make sure that the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel.
3. Attach the wheel wrench and extensions together.
Insert the hoist end through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft.
4. Raise the tire part of the way upward. When the tire is almost in the stored position, adjust the tire so that the valve stem is toward the rear of the vehicle.
yellow blue
A. Hoist Assembly
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Extensions
D. Hoist Shaft
E. Valve Stem,
Pointed Down
F. Flat or Spare Tire
G. Retainer
H. Hoist Cable
5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench until the tire is secure and the cable is tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire moves, use the wheel wrench/hoist shaft to tighten the cable.
Replace the jack, tools and spare tire lock.
5-33
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must use caution.
NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage. When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
yellow blue
5-34
yellow blue
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. If you have a four wheel drive vehicle, shift into 4HI. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear
(or with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.
If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has them. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Using the Recovery Hooks
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.
The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle. You may need to use them if you’re stuck off road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving.
5-35
5-36
CAUTION:
The recovery hooks, when used, are under a lot of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back.
yellow blue
NOTICE:
Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle.
Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty.
yellow blue
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
Checking Things Under the Hood
6 16 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
6 19 Automatic Transmission Fluid
6 23 Manual Transmission Fluid
6 31 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
6 44 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
6 54 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
6 57 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
6 61 GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
6 62 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
6 72 Capacities and Specifications
6-
6-1
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM trained and supported service people.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: yellow blue
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
Your vehicle may have an air bag system. If it does, see
“Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle” in the
Index before attempting to do your own service work.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
6-2
CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it.
D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task.
D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and other fasteners. “English” and “metric” fasteners can be easily confused. If you use the wrong fasteners, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
yellow blue
Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher. It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications which have been developed by the
American Automobile Manufacturers Association
(AAMA) and endorsed by the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means you have a problem.
6-3
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a smog check test. (See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp” in the Index.) If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
yellow blue
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or not the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing
MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for service.
6-4
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system, allowing your emission control system to function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty.
yellow blue
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you’ll be driving.
You can also write us at the following address for advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
6-5
Filling Your Tank
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from gasoline.
While refueling, hang the filler cap by the tether using the hook located on the inside of the filler door.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise).
yellow blue
6-6
CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
yellow blue
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and your fuel tank and emissions system may be damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.
6-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
D Dispense gasoline only into approved containers.
D Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground.
D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete.
D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
Checking Things Under the Hood
CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
yellow blue
6-8
yellow blue
Hood Release
To open the hood, first pull the handle inside the vehicle.
Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on the secondary hood release, located just to the passenger’s side of the center of the grill.
Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly. Pull down the hood and close it firmly.
6-9
VORTEC 4300 V6 Engine
When you lift up the hood you’ll see:
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
B. Coolant Surge Tank
C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator
D. Engine Oil Dipstick
E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick
(If Equipped)
6-10
F. Fan
G. Engine Oil Fill
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
I. Remote Negative Terminal (GND)
J. Remote Positive Terminal
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir
L. Clutch Fluid Reservoir
(If Equipped)
M. Underhood Electrical Center
N. Battery
O. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir yellow blue
VORTEC 4800, 5300 and 6000 V8 Engine
VORTEC 5300 V8 engine shown, locations for other engines similar.
yellow blue
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
B. Coolant Surge Tank
C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator
D. Engine Oil Dipstick
E. Automatic Transmission
Dipstick (If Equipped)
F. Engine Oil Fill
G. Fan
H. Remote Negative Terminal (GND)
I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
J. Remote Positive Terminal
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir
L. Clutch Fluid Reservoir
(If Equipped)
M. Underhood Electrical Center
N. Battery
O. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir
6-11
Engine Oil
The engine oil dipstick has a yellow ring handle and is located on the passenger’s side of the engine.
yellow blue
If the CHECK ENG OIL
LEVEL appears on the instrument panel, it means you need to check your engine oil level right away.
For more information, see “CHECK ENG OIL LEVEL” in the Index.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
6-12
yellow blue
The engine oil fill cap for the VORTEC 4300 V6 engine is located on the driver’s side engine valve cover.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.
The engine oil fill cap for the VORTEC 4800, 5300 and
6000 V8 engines is located on the passenger’s side engine valve cover.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you’re through.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged.
6-13
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
If you change your own oil, be sure you use oil that has the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
6-14
yellow blue
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W to be 0
_F (
30 if it’s going
18
_C) or above. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W 50.
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench
R
oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
20
_F ( 29
_C), consider using either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W 30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures.
yellow blue
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer that lets you know when to change your engine oil. This is not based on mileage, but on engine revolutions and engine operating temperature. When the computer has calculated that the oil needs changing, the GM Oil Life System t will indicate that a change is necessary. The mileage between oil and filter changes will vary depending on how you drive your vehicle - usually between 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) and 7,500 miles (12 500 km) since your last oil and filter change. Under severe conditions, the system may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
Never drive your vehicle more than 7,500 miles
(12 500 km) or 12 months (whichever occurs first) without an oil change.
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So, if you drive in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner. Remember to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message whenever the oil is changed.
6-15
How to Reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Message
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message, turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds. If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message flashes for five seconds, the system is reset.
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all free flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
yellow blue
The air cleaner assembly has an indicator that lets you know when the air filter is dirty and needs to be serviced. The indicator is located on the air cleaner cover.
See “Owner Checks and Services” in the Index to determine when to check the indicator.
If the area inside the clear section of the indicator is not completely yellow, no air filter service is required.
When the area inside the indicator is completely yellow, past the red band, the words “CHANGE FILTER” will be highlighted. After changing the air filter, press the top button on the indicator to reset it.
6-16
yellow blue
Your air cleaner is located in the passenger’s side front corner of the engine compartment.
1. To remove the air filter, loosen the screws on the cover. Lift the cover upward. Lift the filter out of the air cleaner housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible.
2. Clean the filter sealing surface and the filter housing.
3. Install the new filter.
4. Install the cover and tighten the screws on the air cleaner cover.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the air filter. See “Owner Checks and Services” in the Index.
6-17
CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
yellow blue
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passenger compartment air filter. The filter is located under the instrument panel below the glove compartment.
To replace the passenger compartment air filter:
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a panel under the center of the instrument panel, remove the bolts on it to remove the panel. Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have it done at your dealer service department.
NOTICE:
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you’re driving.
6-18
2. If your vehicle does not have a panel under the center of the instrument panel, or when the panel is removed, reach under the instrument panel towards the front of the vehicle and pull downward on the filter retaining bracket.
3. Remove the air filter by pulling downward on the element. Remove the second portion of the air filter by sliding it towards the rear of the vehicle and then pulling downward.
4. Install the new filter by reversing the steps listed previously. Be sure to follow any instructions that may be included in the replacement filter package.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the passenger compartment air filter. See
“Scheduled Maintenance” in the Index.
yellow blue
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90
_F (32_C) or higher.
D In hilly or mountainous terrain.
D When doing frequent trailer towing.
D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid and filter every
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
6-19
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
D When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C).
D At high speed for quite a while.
D In heavy traffic - especially in hot weather.
D While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180
_F to 200_F
(82
_C to 93_C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50
_F
(10
_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), drive the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes. Then follow the hot check procedures.
yellow blue
6-20
yellow blue
Checking Transmission Fluid Cold
A cold check is made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off and is used only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50
_F (10_C) or more. If it’s colder than 50
_F (10_C), you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low during a cold check, you must perform a hot check before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running.
D With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P).
D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).
D Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
1. The red transmission dipstick handle is located at the rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger’s side. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again.
6-21
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area, below the cross hatched area, for a cold check or in the HOT area or cross hatched area for a hot check.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
yellow blue
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.) If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON
R
III, because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON
R
III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
D After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check.”
D When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
6-22
yellow blue
Manual Transmission Fluid
When to Check
A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is changed. See your maintenance schedule to find out when to change your transmission fluid.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at your GM dealership service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the transmission case.
6-23
Then, follow these steps:
5 Speed for VORTEC 4300 V6 and 4800 V8 engines shown, other manual transmissions similar
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more fluid as described in the next steps.
yellow blue
How to Add Fluid
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is self adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid won’t correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
6-24
When to Check and What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine how often you should check the fluid level in your clutch master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid.
yellow blue
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
How to Check and Add Fluid
The proper fluid should be added if the level does not reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it’s in place in the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap.
1500 Series shown, 2500 Series similar
6-25
The proper level for the 1500 Series is from 5/8 inch to
1 5/8 inch (15 mm to 40 mm) below the filler plug. The proper level for the 2500 Series is from 0 to 3/8 inch
(0 to 10 mm) below the filler plug. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
Four
-
Wheel Drive
Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to four wheel drive vehicles. However, they have two additional systems that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant yellow blue
Manual Transfer Case
6-26
yellow blue
Front Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
Automatic Transfer Case
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you may need to add some lubricant.
6-27
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX COOL
R
engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX COOL
R
extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX COOL
R
coolant will:
D Give freezing protection down to 34
_F ( 37
_C).
D Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).
D Protect against rust and corrosion.
D Help keep the proper engine temperature.
D Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you use only DEX COOL
R
(silicate free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner - at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL
R
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
yellow blue
6-28
What to Use
Use a mixture of one half clean, drinkable water and one half DEX COOL
R
coolant which won’t damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don’t need to add anything else.
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX COOL
R
coolant.
yellow blue
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful.
6-29
Checking Coolant
The coolant surge tank is located on the passenger’s side of the engine compartment.
yellow blue
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FILL COLD mark.
If the LOW COOLANT message comes on and stays on, it means you’re low on engine coolant.
See “Low Coolant” in the Index.
CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap - even a little - when the engine and radiator are hot.
6-30
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX COOL
R coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the engine is cool.
yellow blue
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is hand tight.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully installed on the coolant surge tank.
6-31
NOTICE:
Your coolant surge tank pressure cap is a 15 psi
(105 kPa) pressure type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating.
Power Steering Fluid
yellow blue
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
6-32
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
yellow blue
NOTICE:
D When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
D Don’t mix water with ready to use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
D Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it’s very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.
D Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint.
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID. Add washer fluid until the tank is full.
6-33
Brakes
Brake Fluid
yellow blue
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid.
CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
6-34
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
yellow blue
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT 3 brake fluid. Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system, your brakes may not work well, or they may not even work at all. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
6-35
NOTICE:
D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
D If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See “Appearance Care” in the Index.
yellow blue
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to an accident. When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
6-36
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
yellow blue
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking system - for example, when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in - be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change - for the worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
6-37
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco
R
battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco battery.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, remove the black, negative ( ) cable from the battery. This will help keep your battery from running down.
yellow blue
Bulb Replacement
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your GM dealership service department.
Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all the lamps are off and the engine isn’t running. See “Replacement
Bulbs” in the Index for the proper types of bulbs to use.
Halogen Bulbs
CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
6-38
yellow blue
Headlamps
1. Remove the two pins on the top of the headlamp assembly. To remove the pins, turn the outer pin outward and pull it straight up. To remove the inner pin, turn it inward and pull it straight up.
A. Low Beam Headlamp
B. High Beam Headlamp
2. Pull the headlamp lens assembly out.
3. Unplug the electrical connector.
4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp lens assembly.
5. Put the new bulb into the lens assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Plug in the electrical connector.
7. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the vehicle. Install and tighten the two pins.
6-39
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps
A. Sidemarker Lamp
B. Retainer Clip
C. Front Turn Signal Lamp
D. Daytime Running Lamp yellow blue
1. Remove the headlamp lens assembly as mentioned previously.
2. Press the retainer clip, located behind the turn signal housing, towards the outside of the vehicle.
3. Pull the turn signal housing out from the vehicle.
4. Press the locking release lever, turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the turn signal lens housing.
5. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket.
6. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket.
7. Put the bulb socket into the turn signal housing and turn it clockwise until it locks.
8. Put the turn signal housing back onto the vehicle placing the hook and posts on the inner side into the alignment holes first and then the outer side into the retainer bracket until you hear a click.
9. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the vehicle.
6-40
yellow blue
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp
1. Remove the screws and lift off the lamp assembly.
A. Cargo Lamps
B. Center High Mounted Stoplamps
2. Remove the CHMSL bulb holder back plate from the housing by pressing the release tabs.
3. The CHMSL bulb is removed by pulling the bulb straight out from the holder back plate. The cargo lamp is removed by turning the socket counterclockwise and pulling the bulb straight out.
6-41
4. If a CHMSL bulb is replaced, put the bulb into the socket and press it in until it is tight.
5. If a cargo lamp is replaced, put a new cargo lamp bulb into the socket and press it in until it is tight before turning the socket counterclockwise.
6. Put the bulb holder back plate into the lamp housing.
7. Replace the lamp assembly and tighten the screws.
6-42
Taillamps (Pickup Models)
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the two rear lamp assembly screws near the tailgate latch and pull out the lamp assembly.
yellow blue
yellow blue
A. Stoplamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Back up Lamp
3. Press the release tab and turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
5. Press a new bulb into the socket and turn the socket clockwise into the taillamp housing until it clicks.
6. Reinstall the rear lamp assembly and tighten the screws.
7. Close the tailgate.
6-43
Taillamps (Chassis Cab Models)
A. Turn Signal Lamp
B. Stoplamp
C. Back up Lamp
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
yellow blue
1. Using your hands, peel the rubber seal away from the lens.
2. Lift the lens off the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
4. Put a new bulb into the socket and press it in until it is tight.
5. Replace the lens and the lens seal.
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear and cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” in Section 7 of this manual under Part B “Owner
Checks and Services” for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For proper type and length, see “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the
Index. Here’s how to remove the Shephard’s Hook type.
6-44
yellow blue
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly:
1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is facing away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet for details.
CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.
D Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air out and a serious accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.
D Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold.
D Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured or broken by a sudden impact - such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
D Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.
6-45
yellow blue
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Certification/Tire label, which is on the rear edge of the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get the following:
D Too much flexing
D Too much heat
D Tire overloading
D Bad wear
D Bad handling
D Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can get the following:
D Unusual wear
D Bad handling
D Rough ride
D Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
6-46
yellow blue
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more information. Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use to tighten the cable. See “Storing a Flat or
Spare Tire and Tools” in the Index.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals.
When rotating your tires, always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Certification/Tire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.
6-47
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
(See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.) yellow blue
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true:
D You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire.
D You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber.
D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.
6-48
yellow blue
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at the Certification/Tire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias belted or radial) as your original tires.
CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels.
CAUTION:
If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-49
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter type snow tires, space saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to Federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
yellow blue
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
--
AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
6-50
Temperature
--
A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.
yellow blue
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
6-51
CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information.
6-52
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause an accident. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
If your vehicle has P265/75R16 or LT265/75R16 size tires, don’t use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle because there’s not enough clearance.
NOTICE: (Continued) yellow blue
NOTICE: (Continued)
Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install them on the rear tires.
If use tire chains only where legal and only when you must. Use chains that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on the tires of the rear axle.
Don’t use chains on the tires of the front axle.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.
yellow blue
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
D Gasoline
D Benzene
D Naphtha
D Carbon Tetrachloride
D Acetone
D Paint Thinner
D Turpentine
D Lacquer Thinner
D Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous - some more than others - and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
6-53
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
D Alcohol
D Laundry Soap
D Bleach
D Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non Solvent Dry Spot and Soil
Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. You can get
GM approved cleaning products from your dealer.
(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) yellow blue
Here are some cleaning tips:
D Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
D Clean up stains as soon as you can - before they set.
D Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
D Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on the container label to form thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.
Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge to remove the suds.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
6-54
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the multi purpose interior cleaner instructions described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner.
yellow blue
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do it more than once.
D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent based or abrasive cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather.
6-55
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
yellow blue
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.
(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outside of the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon Ami
R
Powder (non scratching glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water.
6-56
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; replace blades that look worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and durability.
yellow blue
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
6-57
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Your vehicle may have a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
yellow blue
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually needed. However, you may use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
6-58
Cleaning Aluminum or
Chrome
-
Plated Wheels (If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish on any wheels other than chrome plated wheels.
Use chrome polish only on chrome plated wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off immediately after application.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
yellow blue
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum based products may damage the paint finish and tires.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
6-59
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you.
yellow blue
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet shaped discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.
This applies only to materials manufactured and sold by
General Motors. Bodies, body conversions or equipment not made or sold by General Motors are not covered.
6-60
yellow blue
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
PART NUMBER
994954
1050172
1050173
1050174
1050214
1050427
1052918**
1052925
1052929
1052930
12345721
12345725
12377964*
12377966*
12377984*
SIZE DESCRIPTION
23 in. x 25 in.
Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
USAGE
Exterior polishing cloth
Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
16 oz. (0.473 L) White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
32 oz. (0.946 L) Vinyl Cleaner
23 oz. (0.680 L) Glass Cleaner
8 oz. (0.237 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
8 oz. (0.237 L)
2.5 sq. ft.
12 oz. (0.354 L)
Armor All t Protectant
Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner
Wheel Cleaner
Capture Dry Spot Remover
Synthetic Chamois
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas t, plastic, rubber and vinyl
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels and floor mats
Spray on and rinse with water
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Silicone Tire Shine
Finish Enhancer
Cleaner Wax
Surface Cleaner
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric
Shines vehicle without scratching
Spray on tire shine
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
* For exterior use only.
** Not recommended for use on instrument panels.
6-61
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine, specifications and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
D your VIN,
D the model designation,
D paint information and
D a list of all production options and special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
yellow blue
6-62
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
yellow blue
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without lighter
- like the radio or cigarette
- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
6-63
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block access door is on the driver’s side edge of the instrument panel. Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.
You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor which is mounted to the fuse block access door. To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse block access door. These can be used to replace a bad fuse.
However, make sure it is of the correct amperage.
NAME
L BODY
Usage
Retained Accessory Power Relay
LOCK Power Door Locks
DRV UNLOCK Power Door Lock Relay
LOCK
HVAC 1
Power Door Lock Relay
Climate Control System
6-64
yellow blue
NAME
CRUISE
IGN 3
4WD
CRANK
INT PRK
L DOOR
BRAKE
RR WIPER
ILLUM
SEAT
TURN
UNLOCK
HTR A/C
Usage
Cruise Control, Instrument Cluster
Ignition, Power Seats
Four Wheel Drive System,
Auxiliary Battery
Starting System
Parking Lamps, Sidemarker
Lamps, Interior Lamps
Power Door Lock Relay
Anti Lock Brake System
Not Used
Interior Lamps
Power Seat Circuit Breaker
Exterior Lamps, Turn Signals,
Hazard Lamps
Power Door Locks
Climate Control System
NAME
WS WPR
IGN 1
AIR BAG
MIR/LOCK
DR LOCK
PWR WDO
UNLOCK
IGN 0
SEO IGN
SEO ACCY
RAP #1
RDO 1
RAP #2 yellow blue
Usage
Windshield Wipers
Ignition, Instrument Panel
Air Bag
Power Mirrors, Power Door Locks
Power Door Locks
Power Window Circuit Breaker
Power Door Lock Relay
PRND321 Display, Odometer,
VCM/PCM
Special Equipment Option,
Ignition, Manual Selectable Ride
Special Equipment Option
Accessory, Cellular Telephone
Retained Accessory Power Relay
Audio System
Not Used
6-65
Center Instrument Panel Utility Block
The center instrument panel utility block is located underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column.
Relay Name
SEO
HTD ST
SPARE 4
6-66
Usage
Special Equipment Option
Heated Seats
Not Used
Relay Name
VANITY
TRAILER
PWR ST
Usage
Headliner Wiring
Trailer Brake Wiring
Power Seats
SPARE 5
CLUTCH
UPF
PARK LAMP
Not Used
Manual Transmission
Clutch Switch
Upfitter
Parking Lamps
FRT PRK EXPT Not Used
SL RIDE Manual Selectable Ride Switch
SPARE 2
RR PRK LP
RR FOG LP
SPARE 3
INAV PWR
CTSY LP
CEL PHONE
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Interior Lights Feed
Courtesy Lamps
Cellular Telephone Wiring yellow blue
Underhood Electrical Center yellow blue
The underhood electrical center is located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment near the battery.
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. The fuse extractor is located in the underhood electrical center. To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
6-67
6-68
yellow blue
Name
STUD #1
ABS
IGN A
AIR
RAP #1
IGN B
RAP #2
STUD #2
TRL R TRN
TRL L TRN
IGN 1
INJ B
STARTER
PARK LP
FRT HVAC
STOP LP
ECM 1
CHMSL
VEH STOP
TRL B/U
Usage
Accessory Power/Trailer
Wiring Feed
Anti Lock Brakes
Ignition Switch
A.I.R. System
Retained Accessory Power, Power
Mirrors, Power Door Locks,
Power Seat(s)
Ignition Switch
Not Used
Accessory Power/Trailer Wiring
Brake Feed
Right Turn Signal Trailer Wiring
Left Turn Signal Trailer Wiring
Ignition, Fuel Controls
Ignition, Fuel Controls (Relay)
Starter (Relay)
Parking Lamps
Climate Control System
Exterior Lamps, Stoplamps
VCM/PCM
Center High Mounted Stoplamp
Stoplamps, Cruise Control
Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring
Name
INJ A
RR HVAC
VEH B/U
ENG 1
ETC
IGN E
B/U LP
ATC
RR DEFOG
RR PRK
ECM B
F/PMP
O2 A
O2 B
LR PRK
RR DEFOG
HDLP yellow blue
Usage
Fuel Controls, Ignition
Not Used
Vehicle Backup Lamps
Engine Controls, Canister Purge,
Fuel System
Electronic Throttle Control
A/C Compressor Relay, Rear
Window Defogger, Daytime
Running Lamps, A.I.R. System
Backup Lamps, Automatic
Transmission Shift Lock
Control System
Automatic Transfer Case
Rear Window Defogger, Heated
Mirrors (Relay)
Right Rear Parking Lamps
VCM/PCM
Fuel Pump (Relay)
Oxygen Sensors
Oxygen Sensors
Left Rear Parking Lamps
Rear Window Defogger,
Heated Mirrors
Headlamps (Relay)
6-69
Name
TRL PRK
RT HDLP
DRL
HTD MIR
LT HDLP
A/C
AUX PWR
SEO 2
SEO 1
DRL
A/C
FOG LP
FOG LP
RADIO
CIGAR
Usage
Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring
Right Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps (Relay)
Heated Mirrors
Left Headlamps
Air Conditioning
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary
Power Outlets
Special Equipment Option Power,
Power Seats, Aux Roof Mnt Lamp
Special Equipment Option Power,
Aux Roof Mnt Lamp, Cell Phone
Daytime Running Lamps
A/C (Relay)
Fog Lamps
Fog Lamps (Relay)
Audio System, Instrument Cluster,
Climate Control System
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary
Power Outlets
Name
RT TURN
BTSI
LT TURN
FR PRK
W/W PMP
HORN
IGN C
RDO AMP
HAZ LP
EXP LPS
HORN
CTSY LP
RR WPR
TBC
Usage
Right Turn Signals
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control System
Left Turn Signals
Front Parking Lamps,
Sidemarker Lamps
Windshield Washer Pump
Horn (Relay)
Ignition Switch, Fuel Pump,
PRND321 Display, Crank
Not Used
Exterior Lamps, Hazard Lamps
Not Used
Horn
Interior Lamps
Not Used
Body Control Module, Remote
Keyless Entry, Headlamps yellow blue
6-70
Replacement Bulbs*
Low Beam Headlamps
High Beam Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Front Marker Lamp
Front Parking and Turn Lamp
Rear Marker Lamp, Taillamp and Stop Lamp
Taillamp and Stop Lamp**
Rear Turn Lamp
Rear Turn Lamp **
Back up Lamp
Back up Lamp **
Center High Mounted Stoplamp
Cargo Lamp
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
* For replacement bulbs not listed here, please consult your dealer.
** Chassis Cab Models
9006
9005
3157KX
194
3157NA
3157
1157
3157
1156
3157
1156
912
912 yellow blue
6-71
yellow blue
Capacities and Specifications
Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for more information. See refrigerant charge label under the hood for charge capacity information and requirements.
Engine
VORTEC 4300
VORTEC 4800
VORTEC 5300
VORTEC 6000
Type
V6
V8
V8
V8
VIN Code
W
V
T
U
Spark Plug Gap
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
Wheels and Tires
Model Description Torque
C/K 1500
C/K 2500
6 bolts (14mm) 140 lb ft (190 N·m)
8 bolts (14mm) 140 lb ft (190 N·m)
Tire Pressure See the Certification/Tire label on the rear edge of the driver’s door or the incomplete vehicle document in the cab.
6-72
Cooling System Capacity (Approximate)
After refill, the level must be rechecked. See “Cooling System” in the Index.
Engine
VORTEC 4300 V6
VORTEC 4300 V6
VORTEC 4800 V8
VORTEC 4800 V8
VORTEC 5300 V8
VORTEC 5300 V8**
VORTEC 6000 V8
VORTEC 6000 V8*
VORTEC 6000 V8
VORTEC 6000 V8*
Transmission
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Manual
Quantity
12.6 quarts (11.9 L)
12.9 quarts (12.2 L)
13.4 quarts (12.7 L)
13.7 quarts (13.0 L)
13.4 quarts (12.7 L)
14.9 quarts (14.1 L)
14.8 quarts (14.0 L)
14.4 quarts (13.6 L)
15.2 quarts (14.4 L)
14.8 quarts (14.0 L)
* Vehicles equipped with the optional engine oil cooler.
** Vehicles equipped with the optional air conditioner.
yellow blue
6-73
Crankcase Capacity (Approximate)
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine oil so that the fluid is within the proper operating range.
See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine
VORTEC 4300 V6
VIN
W
Quantity with Filter
[
4.5 quarts (4.3 L)
VORTEC 4800 V8
VORTEC 5300 V8
VORTEC 6000 V8
V
T
U
6.0 quarts (5.7 L)
6.0 quarts (5.7 L)
6.0 quarts (5.7 L)
[Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
Fuel Tank Capacity (Approximate)
Type
Short Bed
Quantity
26.0 gallons (98.0 L)
Long Bed
Chassis Cab
34.0 gallons (128.0 L)
34.0 gallons (128.0 L) yellow blue
6-74
yellow blue
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing, and are subject to change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was built, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM dealer.
These specifications are for information only. If you have any questions, see the service manual for the chassis or refer to the body manufacturer’s publications.
VIN Code
Oil Filter*
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter*
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Kit**
PCV Valve*
Spark Plugs*
Fuel Filter*
Wiper Blades**
Wiper Blade Type
Wiper Blade Length
W
PF47
A1519C
[
52485513
CV769C
41 932
GF626
15706394
ITTA
22 inches
(56.0 cm)
V
PF59
A1519C
[
52485513
CV948C
41 952
GF626
15706394
ITTA
22 inches
(56.0 cm)
T
PF59
A1519C
[
52485513
CV948C
41 952
GF626
15706394
ITTA
22 inches
(56.0 cm)
U
PF59
A1518C
52485513
CV948C
41 952
GF626
15706394
ITTA
22 inches
(56.0 cm)
*AC part number
**GM part number
[A1518C high capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
6-75
yellow blue
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety, dependability and emission control performance.
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
18 Part B: Owner Checks and Services
7 23 Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
7 25 Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
7 28 Part E: Maintenance Record
7-
7-1
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your dealer
for details. yellow blue
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow recommended maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
7-2
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows what to have done and how often. Some of these services can be complex, so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should let your dealer’s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs.
CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified technician do the work.
yellow blue
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what should be checked and when. It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains important inspections that your dealer’s service department or another qualified service center should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists some recommended products necessary to help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to record and keep track of the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.
If you want to get the service information, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
7-3
Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more frequent checks and replacements. So please read the following and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them. If you go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know that GM trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
yellow blue
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
D carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.
D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits.
D are driven off
“Off
road in the recommended manner. See
Road Driving With Your Four Wheel Drive
Vehicle” in the Index.
D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
7-4
yellow blue
Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) and 200,000 miles
(332 000 km) should be performed at the same intervals after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) and
200,000 miles (332 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
7-5
yellow blue
Scheduled Maintenance
Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication
Scheduled Maintenance
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the GM Oil
Life System t (or every 12 months, whichever occurs
first). Reset the system. The system will show you when to change the oil - usually between 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) and 7,500 miles (12 500 km) since your last oil change. Under severe conditions, the indicator may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle more than 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or
12 months without an oil and filter change.
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So if you drive in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message appears. Remember to reset the
Oil Life System when the oil and filter have been changed. See “Oil Life System” in the Index for information on resetting.
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components with each engine oil and
filter change. Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage, transmission shift linkage, transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, and brake front axle. Ball joints should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10
_F ( 12
_C) or higher, or they could be damaged.
7-6
Scheduled Maintenance
DATE
ENGINE OIL CHANGED
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY: yellow blue
DATE
ENGINE OIL CHANGED
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-7
Scheduled Maintenance
DATE
ENGINE OIL CHANGED
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY: DATE
ENGINE OIL CHANGED
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY: yellow blue
7-8
yellow blue
Scheduled Maintenance
7,500 Miles (12 500 km) j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km) j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-9
Scheduled Maintenance
22,500 Miles (37 500 km) j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km) j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) j Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY: yellow blue
7-10
yellow blue
Scheduled Maintenance
37,500 Miles (62 500 km) j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km) j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-11
Scheduled Maintenance
50,000 Miles (83 000 km) j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90
_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
52,500 Miles (87 500 km) j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY: yellow blue
7-12
yellow blue
Scheduled Maintenance
60,000 Miles (100 000 km) j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. j Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.) j Inspect Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system as described in the service manual.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.) j Inspect Evaporative Control System. Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook up, routing and condition. Check that the purge valve works properly, if equipped. Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-13
Scheduled Maintenance
67,500 Miles (112 500 km) j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km) j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY: yellow blue
7-14
yellow blue
Scheduled Maintenance
82,500 Miles (137 500 km) j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-15
Scheduled Maintenance
97,500 Miles (162 500 km) j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km) j Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service. j Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90
_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY: yellow blue
7-16
yellow blue
Scheduled Maintenance
j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid, change both the fluid and filter.
j Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km) j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
j Change five speed manual transmission fluid (with 4300 V6 or
4800 V8 engines only).
200,000 Miles (332 000 km) j 6000 V8 Engine Only: Change five speed manual transmission fluid.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-17
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in
Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for further details.
yellow blue
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL
R coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index for further details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See “Tires” in the
Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index for further details.
7-18
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Spare Tire Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the wheel wrench/hoist shaft to tighten the cable. See “Storing the
Spare Tire and Tools” in the Index.
yellow blue
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Restriction
Indicator Check
Your vehicle has an indicator located on the air cleaner in the engine compartment that lets you know when the air cleaner filter is dirty and needs to be changed. Check indicator at least twice a year or when your oil is changed, whichever occurs first. See “Air Cleaner” in the Index for more information. Inspect your air cleaner filter restriction indicator more often if the vehicle is used in dusty areas or under off road conditions.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
7-19
Manual Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
“Manual Transmission Fluid” in the Index. Check for leaks. A fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. Have the system inspected and repaired if needed.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
“Automatic Transmission Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if needed.
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir. See
“Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired at once.
yellow blue
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door hinges, hood latch assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, tailgate hinge, tailgate linkage, tailgate handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, locks and folding seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
7-20
Starter Switch Check Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check yellow blue
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below.
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway and try to start the engine. The starter should work only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
7-21
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
D With an automatic transmission, the key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
D With a manual transmission, the key should turn to
LOCK only when you press the key release button.
On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
PARK (P) Mechanism Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
yellow blue
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake.
D To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect.
7-22
Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering and Suspension Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
yellow blue
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, missing or out of position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year.
7-23
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding, and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables.
Drive Axle Service
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add as needed.
Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
yellow blue
Transfer Case
(Four-Wheel Drive) Inspection
Every 12 months or at oil change intervals, check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary.
On manual shift transfer case, oil the control lever pivot point. Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation. More frequent lubrication may be required on off road use.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
7-24
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or specification may be obtained from your dealer.
USAGE
Engine Oil
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine Oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol of the proper viscosity. To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only GM
Goodwrench
R
DEX
Havoline
R
DEX -
COOL
COOL
R
R
or
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index.
yellow blue
USAGE
Hydraulic
Brake System
Windshield
Washer Solvent
Hydraulic
Clutch System
Power
Steering System
Manual
Transmission
(5 Speed with
Low Gear,
RPO MW3)
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Delco Supreme 11
R
Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or equivalent DOT 3 Brake Fluid).
GM Optikleen
R
Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515) or equivalent.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM
Part No. 12345347 or equivalent
DOT 3 Brake Fluid).
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884 1 pint,
1050017 1 quart, or equivalent).
GM Goodwrench Synthetic
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. 12346190 1 qt.) or equivalent SAE 75W 85 GL 4
Gear Oil.
7-25
USAGE
Manual
Transmission
(5 Speed without
Low Gear,
RPO MG5)
Automatic
Transmission
Key Lock
Cylinders
Floor
Shift Linkage
Chassis
Lubrication
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. 12345349 or equivalent).
DEXRON
R
III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi Purpose Lubricant,
Superlube
R
(GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Lubriplate
R
Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2
Category LB or GC LB.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC LB.
USAGE
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Manual
Transfer Case
Automatic
Transfer Case
Front Axle
Propshaft Spline or One Piece
Propshaft Spline
(Two Wheel
Drive with
Auto. Trans.)
Rear Driveline
Center Spline
FLUID/LUBRICANT
SAE 80W 90 Axle Lubricant (GM
Part No. 1052271 or equivalent).
SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. 12378261) or equivalent meeting GM
Specification 9986115.
DEXRON
R
III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transfer Case Fluid
(GM Part No. 12378396).
Spline Lubricant, Special
Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12345879) or lubricant meeting requirements of
GM 9985830.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC LB.
yellow blue
7-26
USAGE
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Hood Hinges
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Tailgate Hinge and Linkage,
Folding Seat and
Fuel Door Hinge
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Lubriplate
R
Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC LB.
Multi Purpose Lubricant,
Superlube
R
(GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Multi Purpose Lubricant,
Superlube
R
(GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
yellow blue
USAGE
Tailgate Handle
Pivot Points,
Hinges, Latch
Bolt and Linkage
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Multi Purpose Lubricant,
Superlube
R
(GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube
R
(GM Part
No. 12371287 or equivalent).
7-27
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED yellow blue
7-28
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
Maintenance Record
SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED yellow blue
7-29
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
Maintenance Record
SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED yellow blue
7-30
yellow blue
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact GMC if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities
10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United
10 Reporting Safety Defects to the
11 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
8 11 Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada
8-
8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
yellow blue
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to GMC. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager.
8-2
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the GMC Consumer Relations Manager by calling
1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, Customer Assistance prompt). In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer
Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.)
D Dealership name and location
D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage yellow blue
When contacting GMC, please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern.
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, file with the
GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
8-3
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing any court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203 1804
Telephone: 1 800 955 5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.
yellow blue
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with GMC by dialing:
1 800 GMC 8583 (462-8583). (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
GMC encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to GMC, the letter should be addressed to GMC’s Customer
Assistance Center.
United States
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 436008
Pontiac, MI 48343-6008
1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583) (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
8-4
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
GMODC Customer Communication Centre
169-007
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 905-644-4112
Fax: 905-644-4866
Caribbean Numbers
1-800-496-9992 (English) Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Puerto Rico
1-800-751-4135 (English) Dominican Republic
1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) Dominican Republic
1-800-496-9994 U.S. Virgin Islands
1-800-389-0009 Bahamas
1-800-534-0122 Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua & B.V.I.
yellow blue
If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean, call Puerto Rico 1-787-763-1315.
GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities
This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle (hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource information, such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers. The program is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1
800 323 9935.
800 833 9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1 800 GM DRIVE (463 7483) for details. When calling from outside Canada, please dial 1 905 644 3063.
All TTY users call 1 800 263 3830.
8-5
Roadside Assistance
GMC’s Roadside Assistance provides stranded owners with over the phone roadside repairs, location of the nearest GMC dealer or the following special services:
Flat Tire Change: Installation of spare tire will be covered at no charge (customer is responsible for repair or replacement of tire).
yellow blue
Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the customer to get to the nearest service station (up to $4.00) will be covered.
Jump Start: No start situations which require a battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
Lock Out: Replacement keys or locksmith service will be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement key will be covered at no charge within 10 miles (16 km).
Emergency Towing Service: Towing to the nearest
GMC dealer for warranty related disablements will be covered.
Deluxe Trip Routing: Custom made, computerized highlighted maps using the most direct or scenic route are provided free of charge. Maps include points of interest and a list of GMC dealers along the route. Also included is a list of hotels along the route that are discounted through affiliation with “Quest
International.” Trip Routing is available through
Roadside Assistance by calling 1 800 GMC 8782
(462-8782). Please be prepared to provide your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). Allow five working days for fulfillment.
8-6
Trip Interruption Assistance: GMC will reimburse any reasonable trip interruption expenses (up to $500.00) when directly associated with warranty disablement. Trip
Interruption service covers expenses such as meals and overnight lodging if vehicle disablement occurs at least
150 miles (240 km) from your home or rental property.
Please Note: you will be required to obtain prior approval from GMC Roadside Assistance and pay for expenses at the time of disablement. Original receipts should be submitted to GMC Roadside Assistance for reimbursement. A service representative will provide assistance when you call.
The Roadside Assistance services listed are available to retail and retail lease customers operating 2000 GMC light duty trucks for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles
(60 000 km). All services must be pre arranged by
GMC Roadside Assistance.
Over the phone assistance, such as providing the name of the closest dealer or minor technical advice, etc., is available to all owner/operators of GMC trucks, regardless of vehicle or mileage.
Just dial GMC Roadside Assistance at
1 800 GMC 8782 (1 800 462 8782, Roadside
Assistance prompt) to reach a qualified representative who can assist you.
yellow blue
Your Roadside Assistance representative will ask for the following information when your call is received:
D Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
D Name and home address
D Telephone number and location from which you are calling
D Location, license plate number and color of your
GMC truck
D Mileage of vehicle and description of problem
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year, including weekends and holidays. Should you have any questions about roadside assistance, call the GMC Roadside Assistance Center or contact your dealer.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
GMC reserves the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1 800 268 6800 for emergency services.
8-7
Courtesy Transportation
GMC has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety related.
If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
yellow blue
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait GMC helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum) may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts.
8-8
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.
yellow blue
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty, alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information.
8-9
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 (or 366 0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline.
yellow blue
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1 800 GMC 8782
(1 800 462 8782), or write:
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 436008
Pontiac, MI 48343 6008
In Canada, please call us at 1 800 263 3777 (English) or 1 800 263 7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 yellow blue
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, owner’s manuals and other service literature are available for purchase for all current and past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
8-11
2000 GMC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION yellow blue
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order, or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2000 GMC
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
2000 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $20.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
8-12
OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)
0
0
2
0 yellow blue
ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)
1-800-551-4123
(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call
1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied against the original order.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
VEHICLE MODEL
NAME YEAR
QTY.
PRICE
EACH*
TOTAL
PRICE
2000 $120.00
Service Manual
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
2000 $50.00
Owner’s Manual In Portfolio 2000 $20.00
Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio 2000 $15.00
G
M
S
H
I
P
T
O
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.
(CUSTOMER’S NAME)
(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(CITY)
(ATTENTION)
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.
GM-GMC-ORD99
(ZIP CODE) (STATE)
( )
AREA CODE
*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
Check or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc. (USA funds only — do not send cash.)
MasterCard
VISA
Discover
Account
Number:
Expiration
Date mo/yr:
TOTAL MATERIAL
Michigan Purchasers add 6% sales tax
U.S. Order Processing
Canadian Postage
(See Note Below)
GRAND TOTAL
$6.00
Check here if your billing address is different from your shipping address shown.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
U.S. order processing.
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement